Pioneer SC-LX72 Owner Manual

Document

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 1 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Operating Instructions audio/video multi-channel receiver

SC-LX

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 2 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

IMPORTANT

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR

BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS

INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel.

IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.

If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.

If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:

Blue : Neutral Brown : Live

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ;

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.

D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En

WARNING

This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture.

D3-4-2-1-3_B_En

WARNING

Before plugging in for the first time, read the following

section carefully.

The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel.

D3-4-2-1-4_A_En

Operating Environment

Operating environment temperature and humidity:

+5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH

(cooling vents not blocked)

Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light)

D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 3 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries

Symbol for equipment

Symbol examples for batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

These symbols are only valid in the European Union.

For countries outside the European Union:

If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

K058a_A1_En

WARNING

To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment.

D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En

VENTILATION CAUTION

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 20 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and

20 cm at each side).

WARNING

Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.

D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En

If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal.

The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).

D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_En

CAUTION

The

 STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.

Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the

AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time

(for example, when on vacation).

D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En

This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes

(such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period.

K041_En

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 4 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

Flow of settings on the receiver . . . . . 7

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 5 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

06 Listening to your system

Auto playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 63

Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 63

Setting the Up Mix function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Better sound using Phase Control and

Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Using Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Using Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Enjoying the Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Features of Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Steps to enjoy the Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Playing back audio files on the network and listening to Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Connecting to the network through LAN interface . . . 69

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

About network playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Windows Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Windows Media DRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

DLNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Content playable over a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

About playback behavior over a network . . . . . . . . . 70

Authorizing this receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Playback with Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Playing back audio files stored on components on the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Listening to Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Listening to Neural Music Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Playing back your favorite songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

About playable file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Advanced operations for Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Saving Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Retrieving saved Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . 76

Setting up the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Checking the network settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

08 KURO LINK

Making the KURO LINK connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Cautions on the KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . 81

About connections with a product of a different brand that supports the KURO LINK function . . . . . 82

KURO LINK Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Setting the PQLS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

09 Using other functions

Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

About the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter)

(SC-LX82 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Switching the HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

10 Controlling the rest of your system

(In case of SC-LX82)

Operating multiple receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Setting the remote to control other components . . . . 93

Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Programming signals from other remote controls . . . 94

Erasing one of the remote control button settings . . . 95

Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Confirming preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Renaming input function names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Direct function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Using multi operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Using System off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Controls for the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

10 Controlling the rest of your system

(In case of SC-LX72)

Operating multiple receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Setting the remote to control other components . . . 100

Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Programming signals from other remote controls . . . 101

Erasing the remote control button settings . . . . . . . 101

Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Programming a multi-operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Using multi operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Using System off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Default preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Controls the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 6 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

Making receiver settings from the Advanced

MCACC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Precision Distance (SC-LX82 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Acoustic Cal EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Output PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Renaming MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Copying MCACC preset data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Clearing MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

12 The system and the other setup

Making receiver settings from the System

Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Power ON Level Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Volume Limit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Remote Control Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Flicker Reduction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

13 Additional information

Speaker Setting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Positional relationship between speakers and monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . 134

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Important information regarding the HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

HOME MEDIA GALLERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

About status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . 140

About iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

About Neural – THX Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

About FLAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

FLAC Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Cleaning the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 7 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Flow of settings on the receiver

The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used easily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.

The colors of the steps indicate the following:

Required setting item

Setting to be made as necessary

1 Before you start

• Checking what’s in the box (page 9)

• Loading the batteries (page 10)



2 Determining the speakers’ application (page

21)

• 7.1ch surround connection

• 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping connection

• 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection

• 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection



3 Connecting the speakers

• Placing the speakers (page 22)

• Connecting the speakers (page 23)

• Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections

(page 24)

• Bi-amping your speakers (page 25)



4 Connecting the components

• About the audio connection (page 26)

• About the video converter (page 27)

• Connecting your TV and playback components

(page 28)

• Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 35)

• Plugging in the receiver (page 43)



5 Power On



6 Changing the OSD display language (OSD

Language) (page 44)



7 Surround back speaker setting (page 121)



8 MCACC speaker settings

• Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto

MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) (page 45)



9 The Input Setup menu (page 47)

(When using connections other than the recommended connections)



10 Basic playback (page 49)



11 Switching the HDMI output (page 91)



12 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired

• Using the various listening modes

• Using surround back channel processing (page 63)

• Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band

Phase Control (page 65)

• Measure the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/

FRONT ALIGN) (page 107)

• Change the channel level while listening ( Tip on page 123)

• Switches on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Sound retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page 85)

• Setting the PQLS function (page 83)

• Setting the Audio options (Tone, Loudness or

Sound delay, etc.) (page 85)

• Setting the Video options (page 87)



13 Other optional adjustments and settings

• KURO LINK Setup (page 82)

• The Advanced MCACC menu (page 106)

• The system and the other setup (page 120)



14 Making maximum use of the remote control

SC-LX82:

• Operating multiple receivers (page 93)

• Setting the remote to control other components

(page 93)

SC-LX72:

• Operating multiple receivers (page 100)

• Setting the remote to control other components

(page 100)

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 8 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Before you start

Chapter 1:

Before you start

Our philosophy

Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater listening experience as close as possible to the vision of the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing on three important steps:

1 Achieving the highest possible sound quality

2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration according to any listening area

3 Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of worldclass studio engineers

1 With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated AIR Studios Monitor:

Features

• Direct Energy HD Amplifier

Through a collaboration, Pioneer and ICEpower have jointly development a unique class D amplifier called a

“Direct Energy High Fidelity Class D (HD) amplifier”. This new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding performance (high output of 770 W (SC-LX82)/700 W

(SC-LX72) simultaneous) with high sound quality and reproduces the latest in multi-channel digital contents.

• Easy setup using Advanced MCACC

The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This innovative technology measures the reverb characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen or using computer. With the additional benefits of numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave control and microphone measurements from a series of reference points, your home theater experience can be truly customized for optimal surround sound.

• THX certified design (In case of SC-LX82)

This receiver bears the THX Ultra2 Plus logo, which means it has passed a rigorous series of quality and performance tests covering every aspect of the product.

This includes testing of pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain, making your home theater experience as faithful as possible to what the director intended.

• THX certified design (In case of SC-LX72)

This receiver bears the THX Select2 Plus logo, which means it has passed a rigorous series of quality and performance tests covering every aspect of the product.

• Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby

Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby

Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD

Master Audio

Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound right into your home with up to six channels of surround sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects) channel for deep, realistic sound effects.

The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby

Surround sources, but will also generate convincing surround sound for any stereo source.

Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and

DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.

Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD, which are designed for the next-generation highdefinition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD, support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.

DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is available only when signals are delivered to this receiver as primary audio).

DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.

• Phase Control

The Phase Control technology incorporated into this receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image at your listening position.

• Full Band Phase Control

The Full Band Phase Control feature analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected and corrects the phase distortion to the flattened frequency-phase characteristics. This

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 9 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Before you start

correction minimizes the group delay of the middle- and low-frequency ranges against the high-frequency range and improves the frequency-phase characteristics across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequencyphase characteristics between channels ensure better surround sound integration.

• Sound Retriever

The Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left over after compression. This helps bring CD quality sound back to WMA and MP3 audio files and achieves a richer sense of presence when playing Dolby Digital, DTS or WMA 9 Pro audio formats recorded in multiple channels on DVDs and other discs.

• HOME MEDIA GALLERY

This receiver can play back contents stored on your computer when your computer is connected to the LAN terminal of this receiver. Also, you can listen to the

Internet radio stations.

• Front Stage Surround Advance

With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality of the original sound.

• Auto Level Control

When the source is played in Auto level control mode

(ALC), this receiver automatically equalizes the playback sound level according to the variation in recording levels.

• Optimum Surround

All movie creators do their best to express movie’s story and use sounds 50 % to achieve it. They assume that the finally mixed sounds should be best sound balance at movie theaters that can perform a big sound. However, in many cases, such a big sound is actually too much for customer’s Home Theater environment, smaller volume is normally used.

In such case, there is possibility that the sound balance is changed/depressed compared to movie theaters. The volume is smaller, the possibility is higher. In short, smaller volume can NOT tell us stories properly as the same as creator’s intention. “Optimum Surround” is a new Pioneer’s surround sound technology that has been newly developed to solve this problem.

Throughout this development, Pioneer has been struggling to consider how we should provide creator’s intention properly with home theater’s sound. And

Pioneer has found an answer = “Optimum Surround” led by two activities as follows. One of them is to know creator’s thought and feelings to communicate with actual creators, and another is to invent some new sound tuning technologies based on Pioneer’s historical technologies.

• HDMI and digital video conversion

This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video format, providing you with high-definition digital video/ audio via a single cable.

High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby

TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also compatible with the Deep Color and x.v.Color feature.

You can operate this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer component that supports the KURO LINK function by connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI. Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and analog video signals being input are converted and output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.

• iPod/iPhone and USB Ready

This receiver has the terminals for connecting an iPod/ iPhone unit and a USB mass storage device.

The iPod terminal is ready for handling digital audio and video, and this receiver’s enhanced compatibility makes on-screen control of your iPod an added possibility.

The USB terminal allows you to listen to two-channel audio from a USB mass storage device connected to this receiver.

Checking what’s in the box

Please check that you’ve received the following supplied accessories:

• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)

• Remote control unit

• Dry cell batteries x2

• AM loop antenna

• FM wire antenna

• iPod cable

• Power cord

• Warranty card

• These operating instructions

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 10 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Before you start

Installing the receiver

• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a level and stable surface.

Don’t install it on the following places:

– on a color TV (the screen may distort)

– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.

– in direct sunlight

– in damp or wet areas

– in extremely hot or cold areas

– in places where there is vibration or other movement

– in places that are very dusty

– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)

• Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel while the power is turned on. The bottom panel gets hot when the power is on, and touching it could cause burns.

Operating range of remote control unit

The remote control may not work properly if:

• There are obstacles between the remote control and the receiver’s remote sensor.

• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor.

• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays.

• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit.

30°

Loading the batteries

In case of SC-LX82

7 m

In case of SC-LX72

CAUTION

Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:

• Never use new and old batteries together.

• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.

• Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.

• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institution’s rules that apply in your country or area.

• WARNING

Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 11 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controls and displays

Chapter 2:

Controls and displays

Remote control (In case of SC-LX82)

RECEIVER

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD TV DVR

VIDEO2 HDMI

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY VIDEO1

USB iPod

PHONO

MULTI CH

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

5 13

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET ENTER

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

RETURN

CH LEVEL

THX MPX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:

• White – Receiver control, TV Control

• Blue – Other controls

1 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch

Switch to perform operations in the main zone, ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 (page 88).

2  RECEIVER

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

3 MULTI OPERATION

Use this button to perform multi operations (page 96).

4 Input function buttons

Press to select control of other components (see

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX82) on page 93).

5 INPUT SELECT

Use to select the input function (page 49).

6 Character display (LCD)

This display shows information when transmitting control signals.

The following commands are shown when you’re setting the remote to control other components (see Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX82) on page 93):

SETUP – Indicates the setup mode, from which you choose the options below.

PRESET – See Selecting preset codes directly on page 93.

LEARNING – See Programming signals from other remote controls on page 94.

MULTI OP – See Multi Operation and System Off on page 96.

SYS OFF – See Multi Operation and System Off on page 96.

DIRECT F – See Direct function on page 96.

RENAME – See Renaming input function names on page 95.

ERASE – See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 95.

RESET – See Resetting the remote control presets on page 95.

READ ID – See Confirming preset codes on page 95.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 12 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controls and displays

RC MODE – See Operating multiple receivers on page 93.

7 TV CONTROL buttons

These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV operation selector switch. Thus if you only have one TV to hook up to this system assign it to the TV operation selector switch (see page 93 or page 100 for more on this).

 – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.

VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.

INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.

CH +/– – Use to select channels.

MUTE – Use to mute the sound or cancel the mute mode.

8 Tuner/component control buttons/HOME MENU

These button controls can be accessed after you have selected the corresponding input function button ( DVD ,

DVR , TV , etc.). The BAND , T.EDIT

and PTY SEARCH tuner controls are explained on page 55.

Set the remote control operation selector switch to

RECEIVER to access the following controls:

AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio options (page 85).

VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video options (page 87).

HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu

(pages 44, 47, 82, 106, 115, 118, 120 and 125).

RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).

///

(TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 106) and the Audio or Video options (page 85 or 87). Also used to control DVD menus/ options and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player.

Use TUNE

/

to find radio frequencies and use

PRESET

/

to find preset stations (page 55).

10 Component control buttons

The main buttons (  ,  , etc.) are used to control a component after you have selected it using the input function buttons.

The controls above these buttons can be accessed after you have selected the corresponding input function button (for example DVD , DVR or TV ). These buttons also function as described below.

Press TUNER first to access:

MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak, then switching to mono will improve the sound quality

(page 55). NOISE CUT MODE 1 to 2 can be selected when receiving AM broadcasts.

Set the remote control operation selector switch to

RECEIVER first to access:

STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings

(page 91).

PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control (page 65).

CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel, then use

/

to adjust the level (page 123).

PQLS – Press to select PQLS setting (page 83).

AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between Auto

Surround (page 58), Auto level control, Optimum

Surround mode and Stream Direct mode (page 62).

STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and

Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 62).

STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and

Neo:6 options (page 59).

ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 60).

THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode

(page 60).

11 Number buttons and other receiver/component controls

Use the number buttons to directly select a radio frequency (page 55) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.

ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV.

After set the remote control operation switch to

RECEIVER :

SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 65).

SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 90).

DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 90).

A.ATT

– Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 90).

SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back channel mode (page 63).

MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets

(page 64).

HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output terminal

(page 91).

Press TUNER first to access:

D.ACCESS

– After pressing, you can access a radio station directly using the number buttons (page 55).

CLASS – Switches between the seven banks (classes) of radio station presets (page 55).

12  SOURCE

Press to turn on/off other components connected to the receiver (see page 93 for more on this).

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 13 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controls and displays

13 Remote control illumination button

Press to turn on/off the illumination of some of the buttons and the LCD light.

14 Remote control operation selector switch

Set to RECEIVER to operate the receiver, TV or SOURCE to operate the TV or the source device.

When this switch is set to RECEIVER , the receiver can be controlled (used to select the white commands above the number buttons ( A.ATT

, etc.)). Also use this switch to set up surround sound.

15 VOL +/–

Use to set the listening volume.

16 MUTE

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

17 AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on DVD or

BD discs.

DISP – Switches between named station presets and radio frequencies.

CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVD/DVR units.

Note

1 Press and hold in the remote control illumination button for 5 seconds to change the illumination mode 1 or 2. When set to LIGHT M2 (default), the illumination only lights when the remote control illumination button is pressed. When switched to LIGHT M1 , the illumination lights whenever buttons are operated. Setting LIGHT M1 will shorten the service life of the batteries.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 14 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controls and displays

Remote control (In case of SC-LX72)

RECEIVER SOURCE

DVD

DVR HDMI

CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

INPUT

SELECT

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC

SBch

D.ACCESS

/CLR

A.ATT

INPUT

HDMI OUT

SLEEP

DIMMER

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

MASTER

VOLUME

TV CONTROL

CH VOL

MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET PRESET ENTER

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

RETURN

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

HDD

STEREO

DVD

THX

STANDARD

MENU

ADV SURR

PHASE CTRL STATUS

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL RECEIVER

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

RECEIVER

The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:

• White – Receiver control, TV Control

• Blue – Other controls

1  RECEIVER

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

2 Input function buttons

Press to select control of other components (see

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX72) on page 100).

3 Number buttons and other receiver/component controls

Use the number buttons to directly select a radio frequency (page 55) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.

ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV.

Press RECEIVER first to access:

INPUT SELECT – Use to select the input function

(page 49).

HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output terminal

(page 91).

SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 65).

MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets

(page 64).

SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 90).

SBch – Use to select the surround back/virtual surround back channel mode (page 63).

A.ATT

– Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 90).

DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 90).

CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel, then use

/

to adjust the level (page 123).

Press TUNER first to access:

D.ACCESS

– After pressing, you can access a radio station directly using the number buttons (page 55).

CLASS – Switches between the seven banks (classes) of radio station presets (page 55).

4 TV CONTROL buttons

 – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.

INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.

CH +/– – Use to select channels.

VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.

5 Tuner/component control buttons/HOME MENU

These button controls can be accessed after you have selected the corresponding input function button ( DVD ,

DVR , TV , etc.). The BAND , T.EDIT

and PTY SEARCH tuner controls are explained on page 55 and page 56.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 15 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controls and displays

Press RECEIVER first to access:

AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio options (page 85).

VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video options (page 87).

HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu

(pages 44, 47, 82, 106, 115, 118, 120 and 125).

RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).

///

(TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER

Use TUNE

/

to find radio frequencies and use PRESET

/

to find preset stations (page 55).

7 Component/Receiver control buttons

The main buttons (  ,  , etc.) are used to control a component after you have selected it using the input function buttons.

The controls above these buttons can be accessed after you have selected the corresponding input function button (for example DVD , DVR or TV ). These buttons also function as described below.

Press TUNER first to access:

MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak, then switching to mono will improve the sound quality (page 55).

NOISE CUT MODE 1 or 2 can be selected when this unit is receiving AM broadcasts.

Press RECEIVER first to access:

AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between Auto

Surround (page 58), Auto level control, Optimum

Surround mode and Stream Direct mode (page 62).

STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and

Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 62).

STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and

Neo:6 options (page 59).

ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 60).

THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode

(page 60).

PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control (page 65).

STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings

(page 91).

PQLS – Press to select PQLS setting (page 83).

8 AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on DVD or

BD discs.

DISP – Switches between named station presets and radio frequencies.

CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVD/DVR units.

9 REMOTE SETUP

Use to input the preset code when making remote control settings and to set the remote control mode

(page 100).

10 TV CTRL

Use this button to set preset code of your TV’s manufacturer when controlling TV (see Selecting preset codes directly on page 100 for more on this).

11 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch

Switch to perform operations in the main zone, ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 (page 89).

12 Remote control LED

Lights when a command is sent from the remote control

(page 100).

13  SOURCE

Press to turn on/off other components connected to the receiver (see page 100 for more on this).

14 MASTER VOLUME +/–

Use to set the listening volume.

15 MUTE

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

16 RECEIVER

Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to select the white commands above the number buttons

( A.ATT

, etc.)). Also use this button to set up surround sound.

Press to turn on/off the illumination of some of the buttons.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 16 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controls and displays

Front panel

1 2 3 4 5 6

INPUT

SELECTOR



STANDBY/ON

PHASE

CONTROL

ADVANCED

MCACC PQLS HDMI

MASTER

VOLUME

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

AUDIO PARAMETER

(TUNE)

VIDEO

(PRESET) ENTER

HOME MENU

(TUNE)

(PRESET)

TUNER EDIT BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

HOME

THX

STANDARD

SURROUND

ADVANCED

SURROUND

STEREO iPod iPhone

RETURN

HDMI 4

VIDEO CAMERA

USB

CONTROL ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE SPEAKERS

MCACC

SETUP MIC PHONES

16 17 18

1  STANDBY/ON

Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power indicator lights when the receiver is on.

When the KURO LINK function is set to ON , the power indicator lights when the power is in standby.

2 INPUT SELECTOR dial

Use to select an input function (page 49).

3 PHASE CONTROL indicator – Lights to indicate

Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control is selected

(page 65).

ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu

(page 85).

PQLS indicator – Lights when the PQLS feature is active (page 83).

HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMIequipped component; lights when the component is connected (page 28).

4 Remote sensor

Receives the signals from the remote control (see

Operating range of remote control unit on page 10).

5 Character display

See Display on page 17.

20 21

6 MASTER VOLUME dial

7 Front panel controls

To access the front panel controls, push gently on the lower third portion of the panel with your finger.

8 AUDIO PARAMETER

Use to access the Audio options (page 85).

9 VIDEO PARAMETER

Use to access the Video options (page 87).

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 17 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controls and displays

///

(TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your HOME

MENU . Use TUNE

/

to find radio frequencies and use

PRESET

/

to find preset stations (page 55).

11 TUNER EDIT

Use with

///

/ ENTER to memorize and name stations for recall (page 55).

12 BAND

Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 55).

13 Listening mode buttons

AUTO SURR / ALC / STREAM DIRECT – Switches between Auto Surround (page 58), Auto level control,

Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode

(page 62).

HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode (page 60).

STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro

Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 59).

ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 60).

STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and

Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 62).

14 MULTI-ZONE controls

If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-

ZONE setup on page 37) use these controls to control the sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 88).

15 SPEAKERS

Use to change the speaker system (page 88).

16 HOME MENU

Press to access the Home Menu (pages 44, 47, 82, 106,

115, 118, 120 and 125).

17 RETURN

Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.

18 HDMI input connector

Use for connection to compatible HDMI device (Video camera, etc.). See Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input on page 41.

19 iPod/iPhone/USB terminals

Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio and video source, or connect a USB device for audio and photo playback (page 42).

20 MCACC SETUP MIC jack

Use to connect the supplied microphone (page 45).

21 PHONES jack

Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.

Display

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

AUTO

PCM

HDMI

DIGITAL

ANALOG

XL XC

LFE

AUTO SURROUND

STREAM DIRECT

THX ADV.SURROUND

STEREO STANDARD

SP AB SLEEP

C R

DIGITAL PLUS

TrueHD WMA9Pro

DTS HD ES 96/24

MSTR

CD TUNER

CD-R PHONO

DSD PCM

MULTI-ZONE

FULL BAND

PQLS ALC ATT

TUNED RDS

STEREO

S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER MONO iPod

DVD

DVR

VIDEO

HDMI

HMG USB

[ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ]

18 19 20 21 22

1 SIGNAL indicators

Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.

AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input signal automatically (page 65).

2 Program format indicators

Light to indicate the channels being input when PCM signals are being input. They do not indicate the audio signals being output from the receiver.

L/R – Left front/Right front channel

C – Center channel

SL / SR – Left surround/Right surround channel dB

LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) indicators light when an LFE signal is being input)

XL / XR – Two channels other than the ones above

XC – Either one channel other than the ones above, the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag

3 Digital format indicators

Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected.

4 S.RTRV

Lights when the Sound Retriever function is active

(page 85).

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 18 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controls and displays

5 MULTI-ZONE

Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 88).

6 DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to

PCM conversion with SACDs.

PCM – Lights during playback of PCM signals.

7 SOUND

Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or tone controls feature is selected (page 85).

Lights when Dialog Enhancement is switched on.

8 FULL BAND

Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on

(page 66).

9 Listening mode indicators

AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto Surround feature is switched on (page 58).

ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level control) mode is selected (page 62).

STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected (page 62).

ADV.SURROUND

– Lights when one of the

Advanced Surround modes has been selected

(page 60).

STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched on (page 61).

STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard

Surround modes is switched on (page 59).

THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is selected (page 60).

10 (PHASE CONTROL)

Lights when the Phase Control or Full Band Phase

Control is switched on (page 65).

11 Analog signal indicators

Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal

(page 90).

12 UP MIX

Lights when the Up Mix is switched on (page 64).

13 Tuner indicators

TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.

STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.

MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using

MPX .

RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is received.

Lights when the sound is muted (page 15).

15 Master volume level

Shows the overall volume level.

“ --” indicates the minimum level, and “ +12dB ” indicates the maximum level.

16 Input function indicators

Light to indicate the input function you have selected.

17 Scroll indicators

Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings.

18 Speaker indicators

Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B

(page 88).

19 SLEEP

Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 90).

20 Matrix decoding format indicators

2 PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro

Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 59).

Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page 59).

21 MSTR

Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master Audio signal.

22 Character display

Displays various system information.

23 Remote control mode indicator

Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1 .) ( SC-LX82: page 93,

SC-LX72: page 100)

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 19 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Chapter 3:

Connecting your equipment

This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.

Important

• Illustration shows the SC-LX82, however connections for the SC-LX72 are the same except where noted.

Rear panel

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1 (DVD)

IN 2 (CD)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

12 V

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

(DVD)

VIDEO

IN 1

P B Y

ZONE 2 OUT

(DVR)

GND

IN 2

MONITOR OUT

IN 3

(VIDEO 1)

COMPONENT VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

PHONO

CD-R/TAPE

OUT IN

VIDEO

DVD

AM LOOP

TV/SAT

VIDEO1

VIDEO2

IN OUT

DVR

FRONT CENTER 16 SURROUND SURROUND BACK

(Single)

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND SURROUND BACK

L L

R SURROUND BACK/

L (Single) R

SURROUND

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

OUT 2

OPTICAL

RS-232C

AC IN

CAUTION

• Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.

• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the top of the receiver.

1 HDMI connectors (x6)

Multiple inputs and two outputs for high-quality audio/ video connection to compatible HDMI devices.



See Connecting your TV and playback components on page 28.



See Switching the HDMI output on page 91.

2 LAN (10/100) terminal



See Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs on page 68.

3 Coaxial digital audio inputs (x3 (SC-LX82), x2 (SC-

LX72))

Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/ recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.



See also The Input Setup menu on page 47 to assign the inputs.

4 Optical digital audio inputs (x4)/outputs (x2)

Use the OUT jack for recording to a CD or MiniDisc recorder.



See Connecting other audio components on page 34.

Use the IN jacks for digital audio sources, including DVD players/recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.



See also The Input Setup menu on page 47 to assign the inputs.

5 12 V trigger jacks (total 50 mA max.) (x2)

Use to switch components in your system on and off according to the input function of the receiver.



See Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 40.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 20 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

6 Remote inputs/output

Use for connection to an external remote control sensor for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.



See Connecting an IR receiver on page 39.

7 Control input/output

Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you can control all your equipment from a single IR remote sensor.



See Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 39.

8 RS-232C connector

Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when using Advanced MCACC or Full Band Phase Control.



See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 40.

9 Component video inputs (x3)

Use the inputs to connect any video source that has component video output, such as a DVD player.



See Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 29.

10 SC-LX82 only: ZONE 2 component video output

Use to connect monitors or TVs in a separate room.



See MULTI-ZONE setup on page 37.

11 MULTI-ZONE audio/video outputs

Use to connect a second or third amplifier and monitors or TVs in a separate room.



See MULTI-ZONE setup on page 37.

12 Composite, S-Video and Component video monitor outputs

Use to connect monitors and TVs.



See Connecting your TV with no HDMI input on page 30.

13 Stereo analog audio source inputs (x3)/output (x1)

Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players, tape decks, turntables, etc.



See Connecting other audio components on page 34.

14 Audio/video source inputs (x5)/output (x1)

Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks for composite video, S-Video and stereo analog audio.



See Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other video sources on page 32.

15 AM and FM antenna terminals

Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio broadcasts.



See Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 35.

16 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs

Use to connect separate amplifiers for front, center, surround, surround back and subwoofer channels.



See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 35 (see also Installing your speaker system on page 24 for powered subwoofer connection).

17 Multichannel analog audio inputs

7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with multichannel analog outputs.



See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 33.

18 Speaker terminals

Use for connection to the main front, center, surround and surround back speakers.



See Connecting the speakers on page 23.

19 AC power inlet

Connect the supplied power cord here.



See Plugging in the receiver on page 43.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 21 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Determining the speakers’ application

Surround sound with a strong sense of presence can be enjoyed by connecting 7 speakers and 1 subwoofer. It is also possible to achieve high sound quality using bi-amp connections and to enjoy music in other rooms using the

MULTI-ZONE feature. High sound quality can be achieved with a minimum of two speakers.

• Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right channels ( L and R ).

• The Surr Back System setting must be made if you use any of the connections shown below other than

[1] (see Selecting the Surr Back system on page 26).

[1] 7.1ch surround connection

(Simple connection & Best surround)

*Default setting

These connections prioritize surround sound with a speaker layout like that in a movie theater.

• Surr Back System setting: Normal (default)

• If you have six speakers, either only connect one surround back speaker (6.1 ch surround), or connect for the 7.1-channel setting as shown on the diagram below but without the center speaker.

[3] 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection

(Multi Zone)

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy

5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices is limited.)

• Surr Back System setting: ZONE 2

Front left

Subwoofer

Center

Front right

Left

Right

ZONE 2

Surround left

Surround right

[4] 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy

5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers.

• Surr Back System setting: Speaker B

Front left

Subwoofer

Center

Front right

Speaker B

Front left

Subwoofer

Surround left

SBL

Surround back left

Center

Front right

SBR

Surround back right

Surround right

[2] 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping connection

(High quality surround)

Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.

• Surr Back System setting: Front Bi-Amp

Surround left

Surround right

Other speaker connection

• Your favorite speaker connections can be selected even if you have fewer than 5.1 speakers.

• When not connecting a subwoofer, connect speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency component is played from the front speakers, so the speakers could be damaged.)

• After connecting, be sure to conduct the Auto

MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure.

See Automatically setting up for surround sound

(Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45.

Front left*

Subwoofer

Center

Surround left

Front right*

Surround right

*Bi-amp compatible speaker

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 22 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Placing the speakers

To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below.

5.1 channel surround system:

Center

Front left

Subwoofer

Front right

Surround left

6.1 channel surround system:

Center

Front left

Subwoofer

Surround left

120°

7.1 channel surround system:

Center

Front left

Subwoofer

120°

Surround Back

Surround right

Front right

Surround right

Front right

Surround left

Surround back left

90°

60°

90°

Surround right

Surround back right

THX speaker system setup

If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the THX

INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.

See also THX Audio Setting on page 124 to make the settings that will give you the best sound experience when using the Home THX modes (page 60).

Some tips for improving sound quality

Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system.

• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.

• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers

2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.

• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower angle.

• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.

• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the size of the room.

Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.

• Surround and surround back speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and tilted slight downward. Make sure the speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.

• If the surround speakers cannot be set directly to the side of the listening position with a 7.1-channel system, the surround effect can be enhanced by turning off the Up Mix function (see Setting the Up

Mix function on page 64).

• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 23 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting the speakers

Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves.

CAUTION

• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage . To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts.

• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.

If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.

Bare wire connections

1 Twist exposed wire strands together. (fig. A)

2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire. (fig. B)

3 Tighten terminal. (fig. C) fig. A

10 mm fig. B fig. C

Important

• Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers.

• Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. It is not possible to connect using speaker cables.

CAUTION

• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.

This not only improves sound quality, but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 24 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Installing your speaker system

At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).

Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections

Subwoofer Center

Front left Front right

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1 (DVD)

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

(DVD)

IN 1

ZONE 2 OUT

IN 2 (CD)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

IN 2 IN 3

(DVR)

SIGNAL

GND

MONITOR OUT

(VIDEO 1)

1 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK

(Single)

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

PHONO

CD-R/TAPE

OUT IN

VIDEO

DVD

TV/SAT

VIDEO1

VIDEO2

IN OUT

DVR

FRONT CENTER

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND SURROUND BACK

SUBWOOFER

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

OUT 2

OPTICAL

RS-232C

AC IN

Surround left

The surround back terminals can also be used for the Speaker B and ZONE 2.

7.1 ch surround setting

Surround back left Surround back right

6.1 ch surround setting

Surround back No connect

Speaker B setting

Speaker B - Left Speaker B - Right

ZONE 2 setting

ZONE 2 - Left ZONE 2 - Right

Surround right

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 25 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Bi-amping your speakers

Bi-amp compatible speaker Center

Subwoofer

Bi-amp compatible speaker

High

Front left

Low

High

Low

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1 (DVD)

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

(DVD)

IN 1

ZONE 2 OUT

IN 2 (CD)

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

IN 2 IN 3

(DVR)

SIGNAL

GND

MONITOR OUT

P R

(VIDEO 1)

P B Y

1 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK

(Single)

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

PHONO

CD-R/TAPE

OUT IN

VIDEO

DVD

TV/SAT

VIDEO1

VIDEO2

IN OUT

DVR

FRONT CENTER

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND SURROUND BACK

SUBWOOFER

RS-232C

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

Front right

AC IN

Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.

CAUTION

• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High to the

Low terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.

• If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing so may damage your speakers.

Surround right Surround left

Bi-wiring your speakers

Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support biamping.

• With these connections, the Surr Back System setting makes no difference.

• To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.

CAUTION

• Don’t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way.

• When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for biamping shown at the left.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 26 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Selecting the Surr Back system

The surround back terminals can be used for bi-amping,

Speaker B and ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the surround back speakers. Make this setting according to the application.

ZONE 2 setup

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy

5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.

See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections on page 24.

2 Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the Surr Back System menu.

See Surround back speaker setting on page 121 to do this.

Speaker B setup

You can listen to stereo playback in another room.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.

See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections on page 24.

2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Surr Back System menu.

See Surround back speaker setting on page 121 to do this.

Bi-Amping setup

Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.

1 Connect Bi-amp compatible speakers to the front and surround back speaker terminals.

See Bi-amping your speakers on page 25.

2 Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the Surr Back System menu.

See Surround back speaker setting on page 121 to do this.

About the audio connection

There are several types of audio input and output terminals on this receiver. The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order when you choose

AUTO as the input signal:

Types of cables and terminals

HDMI

Transferable audio signals

HD audio

Digital (Coaxial)

Digital (Optical)

RCA (Analog)

(White/Red)

Conventional digital audio

Conventional analog audio

• With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals can be transferred in high quality over a single cable.

CAUTION

• When connecting optical cables, be careful when inserting the plug not to damage the shutter protecting the optical socket.

• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 27 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

About the video converter

The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the MONITOR OUT jacks. The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s

HDMI video outputs when connecting this video source.

If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 47), the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-Video, then composite (in that order).

Source device

Terminal for connection with source device

INPUT

SELECTOR



STANDBY/ON

PHASE

CONTROL

ADVANCED

MCACC PQLS HDMI

This receiver

MASTER

VOLUME

TV monitor

Terminal for connection with TV monitor

Types of cables

HDMI IN HDMI OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

S-VIDEO IN S-VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO IN VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

Video signals can be output

• For optimal video performance, THX recommends switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the

Video options on page 87) OFF .

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain

U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners.

Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.

Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Note

1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion

(in Setting the Video options on page 87) OFF .

• The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p and

1080i. 1080p signal cannot be converted.

• Only signals with an input resolution of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the composite and S-Video MONITOR

OUT .

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 28 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your TV and playback components

Connecting using HDMI

If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.), you can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.

If the TV and playback components support the Pioneer KURO LINK feature, the convenient KURO LINK functions can be used (see KURO LINK on page 81).

Other HDMI/DVIequipped component

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor or flat screen TV

HDMI/DVI-compatible

Blu-ray disc player

Select one

DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT

OPTICAL R ANALOG L

HDMI OUT

This connection is required in order to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver.

OUT

1 -

LAN

(10/100)

IN 1 (DVD)

IN 2 (CD)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT 2

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

(DVD)

IN 1

ZONE 2 OUT

IN 2 IN 3

(DVR)

SIGNAL

GND

MONITOR OUT

P B Y

(VIDEO 1)

1 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ANTEN

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

PHONO

CD-R/TAPE

OUT IN

DVD

SPEAKERS

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

R SURROUND BACK/

L (Single) R

RS-232C

• When connecting a Blu-ray disc player, connect the player to the receiver’s BD IN terminal.

• When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor or a flat screen TV using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal, switch the HDMI output setting to HDMI

OUT 2 or HDMI OUT ALL . See Switching the HDMI output on page 91.

• The HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an

HDMI-equipped component is connected.

• For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see Connecting your

DVD player with no HDMI output on page 29).

• If your Blu-ray disc player offers multi-channel analog audio outputs, see Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 33.

• The sound of the TV cannot be heard over the receiver if the TV is connected using an HDMI cable.

If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 29 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no

HDMI output) to the receiver.

DVD player, etc.

Select one

DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L

Select one

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R P B Y

VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO VIDEO

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor or flat screen TV

HDMI IN

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

IN 1 (DVD)

IN 2 (CD)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT 2

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

IN 1

ZONE 2 OUT

IN 2

(DVR)

SIGNAL

GND

MONITOR OUT

(VIDEO 1)

IN 3

S-VIDEO

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

PHONO

CD-R/TAPE

OUT IN

VIDEO

SPEAKERS

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

R SURROUND BACK/

L (Single)

RS-232C

• If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables.

• Component video should give superior picture quality when compared to composite or S-Video. You can also take advantage of progressive scan video (if your source and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable, flicker-free picture. See the manuals that came with your TV and source component to check whether they are compatible with progressive-scan video.

• If your DVD player offers multi-channel analog audio outputs, see Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 33.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 30 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your TV with no HDMI input

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to the receiver.

• With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI cable.

Connect the DVD player’s video signals using a composite, S-VIDEO or component cord.

HDMI OUT

Select one

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL R

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG L

DVD player, etc.

P R P B

Select one

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO VIDEO

Select one

VIDEO IN

S-VIDEO VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

P R P

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

IN 1 (DVD)

IN 2 (CD)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT 2

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

IN 1

ZONE 2 OUT

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

RS-232C

VIDEO

(DVR)

IN 2

SIGNAL

GND

IN 3

(VIDEO 1)

ASSIGNABLE 3

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

PHONO

CD-R/TAPE

OUT IN

SPEAKERS

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

R SURROUND BACK/

L (Single)

• Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to input video signals.

Depending on the video component, it may not be possible to output signals connected by HDMI and other methods simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make output settings. Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your component for more information.

• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs, you can connect these instead. See also see

Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 33.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 31 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

• The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to The

Input Setup menu on page 47 to change the assignments if other connections are used.

For example, the BD terminal is fixed to BD input; no other audio and video signals can be input to this terminal.

Input function

DVD

TV/SAT

DVR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2

HDMI 1

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

(front panel)

CD-R/TAPE

Digital

COAX-1

Input Terminals

HDMI Component

IN 1

( BD )

OPT-1

OPT-2

OPT-3

COAX-3 a

IN 2

IN 3

( HDMI-1 )

( HDMI-2 )

( HDMI-3 )

( HDMI-4 )

COAX-2

OPT-4 a.

SC-LX82 only

About HDMI

The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the connected component is compatible with, including

DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby

TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for limitations), Video CD/Super VCD and CD. See About the video converter on page 27 for more on HDMI compatibility.

This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia

Interface (HDMI™) technology.

This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections.

• Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))

• Deep Color signal transfer

• x.v.Color signal transfer

• Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels

• Input of the following digital audio formats:

– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio), DVD-

Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD

• Synchronized operation with components using the

KURO LINK function (see KURO LINK on page 81)

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia

Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing, LLC.

“x.v.Color” and x.v.Color logo are trademarks of Sony

Corporation.

Note

1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content

Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVI



HDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.

• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.

• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.

• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.

2 Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 32 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other video sources

This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices, including HDD/DVD recorders and VCRs.

When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The

Input Setup menu on page 47).

HDD/DVD recorder, VCR, etc.

Select one

DIGITAL IN AUDIO IN

OPTICAL R ANALOG L

Select one

VIDEO IN

VIDEO S-VIDEO

Select one

VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO VIDEO

Select one

AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT

ANALOG L OPTICAL COAXIAL

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

IN 1 (DVD)

IN 2 (CD)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

OUT 2

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

(DVD)

IN 1

ZONE 2 OUT

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

IN 2 IN 3

(DVR)

SIGNAL

GND

MONITOR OUT

P R

(VIDEO 1)

COMPONENT VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP

FRON

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

PHONO

CD-R/TAPE

OUT IN

DVD

TV/SAT

VIDEO1

VIDEO2

SPEAKERS

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

R SURROUND BACK/

L (Single) R

SURROUND

FRON

RS-232C

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 33 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box

Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.

When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to

(see The Input Setup menu on page 47).

STB

Connecting the multichannel analog inputs

For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending on whether your player supports surround back channels). Make sure that the player is set to output multichannel analog audio.

DVD player, etc.

Select one

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

AUDIO OUT

R ANALOG L

Select one

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO S-VIDEO

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT

FRONT

OUTPUT

CENTER

OUTPUT

SURROUND

OUTPUT

SURROUND BACK

OUTPUT

R L

IN 1 (DVD)

IN 2 (CD)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1 1

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

OUT 1

OUT 2

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

(DVD)

IN 1

ZONE 2 OUT

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

IN 2 IN 3

(DVR)

P R

SIGNAL

GND

P B Y

MONITOR OUT

(VIDEO 1)

1 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ANTENNA

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

PHONO

CD-R/TAPE

OUT IN

VIDEO

DVD

SPEAKERS

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

R SURROUND BACK/

L (Single) R

VIDE

RS-232C

VIDEO

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP

DVD

TV/SAT

VIDEO1

VIDEO2

IN OUT

DVR

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK

(Single)

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT CENTER gle) R SURROUND L

R FRONT L CENTER

• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L jack on this receiver.

• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the surround back channel.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 34 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting other audio components

This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback.

This receiver features five stereo audio-only inputs. One of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with audio recorders.

One of the audio inputs ( PHONO ) is a dedicated turntable input which should not be used for any other type of component. This input also has a grounding terminal that most turntables require.

Most digital components also have analog connections.

When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The

Input Setup menu on page 47).

CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.

Turntable

Select one

AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT

ANALOG L OPTICAL COAXIAL

Select one

DIGITAL IN AUDIO IN

OPTICAL R ANALOG L

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1 (DVD)

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

(DVD)

IN 1

ZONE 2 OUT

IN 2 (CD)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

IN 2 IN 3

(DVR)

SIGNAL

GND

MONITOR OUT

(VIDEO 1)

1 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

S-VIDEO

ANTENNA

VIDEO

DVD

TV/SAT

VIDEO1

SPEAKERS

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

ATTENTION:

ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6

Ω

- 16

Ω

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

R SURROUND BACK/

L (Single) R

SUR

OUT 2 RS-232C

• If you’re connecting a recorder, connect the analog audio outputs to the analog audio inputs on the recorder.

Turntables only:

• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the ground terminal on this receiver.

• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs instead.

About the WMA9 Pro decoder

This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9

Professional

(WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using HDMI, coaxial or optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9

Pro-compatible player. However, the connected DVD player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital output.

Note

1 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 35 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting additional amplifiers

This receiver has more than enough power for any home use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers.

ANALOG

INPUT

Front channel amplifier

ANALOG

INPUT

Center channel amplifier (mono)

ANALOG

INPUT

Surround channel amplifier

Connecting AM/FM antennas

Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality, connect external antennas (see Connecting external antennas below).

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP

2 fig. a fig. b

AM LOOP

SURROUND SURROUND BACK

(Single)

OUT

DVR

FRONT CENTER

MULTI CH IN

SURROUND SURROUND BACK

SUBWOOFER

FRONT L CENTER

ANALOG

INPUT

Surround back channel amplifier

ANALOG

INPUT fig. c

Powered subwoofer

• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In this case plug the amplifier into the left ( L (Single) ) terminal only.

• The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the Surround back speaker setting on page 121.

• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the speaker system to OFF , or simply disconnect any speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.

If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 121) to LARGE .

1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires.

2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.

3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.

To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction indicated by the arrow ( fig. a ) then clip the loop onto the stand ( fig. b ).

• If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other surface, secure the stand with screws ( fig. c ) before clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.

4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception.

5 Connect the FM wire antenna in the same way as the AM loop antenna.

For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 36 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting external antennas

To improve FM reception connect an external FM antenna to the FM UNBAL 75

Ω

coaxial cable

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP

To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.

For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.

Outdoor antenna

Indoor antenna

(vinyl-coated wire)

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP

5 m to 6 m

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 37 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

MULTI-ZONE setup

This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-

ZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is shown below, but the number of MULTI-ZONE connections (and the way you choose to connect them) depends on how you want to set up your system.

Sub zone ( ZONE 3 ) Sub zone ( ZONE 2 ) Main zone

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1 (DVD)

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

(DVD)

IN 1

ZONE 2 OUT

IN 2 (CD)

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

SPEAKERS

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDA

ATTENTIO

ENCEINTE D'IMPE

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

RS-232C

(DVR

Different sources can be playing in three zones at the same time or, depending on your needs, the same source can also be used. The main and sub zones have independent power (the main zone power can be off while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls. However, you may need to specify the volume settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 126.

Making MULTI-ZONE connections

It is possible to make these connections if you have a separate TV and speakers for your primary ( ZONE 2 ) sub zone, and a separate TV and a separate amplifier

(and speakers) for your secondary ( ZONE 3 ) sub zone. You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the

MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on page 38 for your primary sub zone. There are two primary sub zone setups possible with this system. Choose whichever works best for you.

MULTI-ZONE listening options

The following table shows the signals that can be output to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3:

Sub Zone

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

Input functions available

Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT).

With video signals, b

the composite video

(VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT) and component video

(COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT) c

signals can be output d

but the S-Video signal cannot be output.

Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT).

With video signals, b

the composite video

(VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT) signals can be output.

a.Any analog signal. (This does not apply for the MULTI CH IN and

PHONO inputs.) b.JPEG files cannot be played with the input set to USB input.

c.The COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is only provided on the

SC-LX82. The OSD is not displayed if only the COMPONENT VIDEO

ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected.

SC-LX82 only: The video convert function does not work for ZONE 2.

Connect the composite video and component video to the same types of jacks for the inputs and outputs.

Note

1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub zone. You can, however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 38 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)

• Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2

OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack, both on this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown below.

Sub zone ( ZONE 2 ) Main zone

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1 (DVD)

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

(DVD)

IN 1

P Y

ZONE 2 OUT

IN 2 (CD)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

SPEAKERS

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

OUT 2

OPTICAL

RS-232C

MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)

You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting on page 121 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling the main zone (for example, changing the input function or starting playback).

• Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT

1 jacks on this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the surround back speaker terminals as shown below.

Sub zone ( ZONE 2 ) Main zone

VIDEO IN

IN 1

(DVD)

ZONE 2 OUT

IN 2 IN 3

(DVR)

SIGNAL

GND

MONITOR OUT

(VIDEO 1)

ASSIGNABLE

COMPONENT VIDE

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

PHONO

CD-R/TAPE

OUT IN

DVD

SPEAKERS

CAUTION:

ATTENTION:

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

Ω

- 16

Ω

- 16

Ω

Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 3)

• Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 3

OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT jack, both on this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown below.

Sub zone ( ZONE 3 ) Main zone

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1 (DVD)

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

(DVD)

P R

IN 1

P B Y

ZONE 2 OUT

IN 2 (CD)

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

RS-232C

SPEAKERS

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION

SPEAKER IMPE

ATTENTIO

ENCEINTE D'IM

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MOD

D'EMPLOI

Note

1 SC-LX82 only: COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to output clear images.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 39 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting an IR receiver

If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote control in another zone, you can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver.

1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver.

Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor

Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks which can be used to link components together so that you can use just the remote sensor of one component.

When you use a remote control, the control signal is passed along the chain to the appropriate component.

Closet or shelving unit

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1 (DVD)

IN 2 (CD)

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

P R

Non-Pioneer component

Pioneer component

CONTROL

OUT 2

OPTICAL

RS-232C

OUT IN

IR receiver

2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the

IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the

IR receiver.

Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection.

• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor below to connect to the

CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.

Important

• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you also have at least one set of analog audio, video or

HDMI jacks connected to another component for grounding purposes.

1 Decide which component you want to use the remote sensor of.

When you want to control any component in the chain, this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the corresponding remote control.

2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.

Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT 2

OPTICAL

OUT

RS-232C

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

PHO

SPEAKERS

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION:

SPEAKER IMPEDANC

ATTENTION

ENCEINTE D'IMPEDA

SELECTABLE

VOIR LE MODE

D'EMPLOI

IN OUT

CONTROL

IN OUT

CONTROL

Continue the chain in the same way for as many components as you have.

Note

1 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.

• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.

• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.

2 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, see Setting the remote to control other components on page 93

(SC-LX82) /page 100 (SC-LX72) .

• If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 40 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger

You can connect components in your system (such as a screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input function. However, you must specify which input functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup menu on page 47. Note that this will only work with components that have a standby mode.

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

12 V

TRIGGER

IN 1 (DVD)

IN 2 (CD)

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

LAN

(10/100)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT 2

OPTICAL

TOTAL

50 mA

RS-232C

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

12 V

TRIGGER

• Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to the 12 V trigger of another component.

Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.

• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA.

After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on page 47.

Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output

When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

(see page 112) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of your listening room, the 3D graphs of the reverb characteristics and group delay characteristics in your listening room (before and after calibration) can be checked on a computer screen by connecting the receiver to the computer and using a special application to transfer the data. The various MCACC parameters can also be checked on the computer.

Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be cross type, female–female).

The software to output the results is available from the support area of the Pioneer website (http:// www.pioneer.eu). Instructions for using the software are also available here. If you have any questions about the software, please contact the Pioneer Service Center specified on your warranty card.

Please make sure your system meets the following requirements:

• The computer must be a PC functioning with one of the following operating systems: Microsoft

Windows

Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/

Ultimate SP1, Windows

XP Professional/Home

Edition SP3 or Windows

2000 Professional SP4.

• The monitor must have a display resolution of 800 x

600 dots (SVGA) or greater.

• The computer must be equipped with at least one RS-

232C port.

• System must have internet access.

Microsoft

, Windows

Vista, Windows

XP and Windows

2000 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Note

1 Triggered connections with up to two devices compatible with 12 volt triggers can be made with this receiver.

2 Laptops and other computers not equipped with an RS-232C port can be connected via USB port using a commercially available USB to

RS-232C converter cable (USB to serial converter cable). For instructions on COM port connections and settings, contact the manufacturer of your computer.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 41 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

• Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on the rear panel of the receiver.

Make sure that the receiver and all connected components are switched off and disconnected from the power outlet when you do this.

Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS-

232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on this receiver. See the documentation provided with the

Advanced MCACC application for more information.

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

LAN

(10/100)

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1 (DVD)

12 V

TRIGGER

(OUTPUT

12V

TOTAL

50 mA

MAX)

(DVD)

IN 1

ZONE 2 OUT

IN 2 (CD)

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

SPEAKERS

SELECTABLE

SEE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

CAUTION

SPEAKER IMPE

ATTENTI

ENCEINTE D'IM

SELECTABL

VOIR LE MOD

D'EMPLOI

Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input

There is an HDMI input terminal on the front panel. High quality pictures can be viewed via the receiver simply by connecting an HDMI-equipped video camera with a single HDMI cable. HDMI-equipped components other than video cameras can also be connected to this terminal.

• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel door to access the front panel input.

• Select this input using HDMI , INPUT SELECT

(remote) or the INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to select HDMI 4 .

TUNER EDIT BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

HOME

THX

STANDARD

SURROUND

ADVANCED

SURROUND

STEREO iPod iPhone

HDMI 4

VIDEO CAMERA

USB

CONTROL ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE SPEAKERS

MCACC

SETUP MIC PHONES

This receiver

RS-232C

Personal computer

Video camera, etc.

Note

1 The various parameters, the reverb characteristics data and group delay characteristics data used for display on the computer are not cleared when the power is turned off (see Output PC on page 117).

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 42 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting an iPod

This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio or video content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver.

• Switch the receiver into standby then use the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to the iPod/ iPhone/USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel door to access the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal.

• It is also possible to connect using the cable included with the iPod, but in this case it is not possible to view pictures via the receiver.

• For the cable connection, refer to also the operating instructions for iPod.

• For instructions on playing the iPod, see Playing an iPod on page 50.

Connecting a USB device

It is possible to playback files using the USB interface on the front of this receiver.

• Switch the receiver into standby then connect your

USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel door to access the USB terminal.

• For instructions on playing the USB device, see

Playing a USB device on page 52.

TUNER EDIT BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

HOME

THX

STANDARD

SURROUND

ADVANCED

SURROUND

STEREO iPod iPhone

HDMI 4

VIDEO CAMERA

USB

CONTROL ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE SPEAKERS

MCACC

SETUP MIC PHONES

This receiver

TUNER EDIT BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

HOME

THX

STANDARD

SURROUND

ADVANCED

SURROUND

STEREO iPod iPhone

HDMI 4

VIDEO CAMERA

USB

CONTROL ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE SPEAKERS

MCACC

SETUP MIC PHONES

This receiver

USB mass storage device iPod cable

(supplied)

MENU



 iPod



SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 43 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Connecting your equipment

Plugging in the receiver

Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver, including the speakers.

1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.

2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.

CAUTION

• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a replacement.

• Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this unit.

• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than that described below.

• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on vacation.

• Make sure the blue  STANDBY/ON light has gone out before unplugging.

Note

1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the KURO LINK mode to OFF , you can skip this process. For details about the KURO LINK feature, see KURO LINK on page 81.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 44 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic Setup

Chapter 4:

Basic Setup

Important

• The procedure for setting the receiver operation mode differs for the remote controls included with the SC-LX82 and SC-LX72. For the SC-LX82’s remote control, set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER . For the SC-LX72’s remote control, press the RECEIVER button. When “set the remote control to the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these instructions, use the respective procedure described above.

Changing the OSD display language

(OSD Language)

The language used on the Graphical User Interface screen can be changed.

• The explanations in these operating instructions are for when English is selected for the GUI screen.

SC-LX82:

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD TV DVR

HDMI

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY VIDEO1

USB iPod

VIDEO2

PHONO

MULTI CH

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

SC-LX72:

SOURCE

TV CONTROL

VOL

INPUT

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

MUTE

TUNE

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

CH LEVEL

SOURCE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

T.EDIT

GUIDE

DVD BD DVR HDMI

PRESET

TV CD CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

INPUT

PRESET

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.

Use  RECEIVER to switch on.

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your

TV. Use

///

and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU.

4 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup menu.

4.SystemSetup

A/V RECEIVER a.Manual SP Setup b. Input Setup c. OSD Language d. Other Setup

4c.OSD Language

A/V RECEIVER

Exit Return Exit

5 Select the desired language.

• English

• French

• German

• Italian

• Spanish

• Dutch

• Russian

6 Select ‘OK’ to change the language.

4c.OSD Language

A/V RECEIVER

Return

Exit Return

The setting is completed and the System Setup menu reappears automatically.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 45 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic Setup

Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase

Control)

The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided with your system, the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room, and also to calibrate the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected.

Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a source on page 49.

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.

Use  RECEIVER to switch on.

2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.

• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

AUDIO PARAMETER

(TUNE)

VIDEO

(PRESET)

ENTER

(PRESET)

TUNER EDIT BAND

HOME MENU

(TUNE)

RETURN

HDMI 4

VIDEO CAMERA

USB iPod iPhone

STEREO

CONTROL ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE SPEAKERS

MCACC

SETUP MIC PHONES

Important

• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.

• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.

• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the headphones should be disconnected and the iPod/

USB or HOME MEDIA GALLERY function should not be selected as an input function.

If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.

The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected.

1a.Full Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

Surr Back System : Normal

Save SYMMETRY to : M1.MEMORY 1

START

CAUTION

• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.

SC-LX82:

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD

VIDEO1

USB iPod

PHONO

VIDEO2

MULTI CH

HDMI

DVR

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

SC-LX72:

SOURCE

TV CONTROL

VOL

INPUT

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

MUTE

TUNE

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

CH LEVEL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

SOURCE

TOP MENU

BAND

DVD BD DVR HDMI

PRESET

TV CD CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

INPUT

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

TV/DTV MPX

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

PQLS

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

Exit Return

3 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

Note

1 It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.

2 • You can’t use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB or HOME MEDIA GALLERY input function is selected (in either the main or sub zone).

When you set ZONE 2 , ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 88), you can’t use the HOME MENU .

• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 46 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic Setup

4 Select Surr Back System setting,

select an MCACC preset

, then select START.

Select Normal (Surround back), Speaker B , Front Bi-

Amp or ZONE 2 for the Surr Back System setting according to connections to the surround back speaker terminals.

5 Follow the instructions on-screen.

Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to a comfortable volume level.

6 Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.

If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘ OK ’ and press ENTER in step 7.

• With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise!

or Check microphone.

) select RETRY after checking for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.

1a.Full Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

Now Analyzing... 2/10

Environment Check

Ambient Noise : OK

Microphone :

Speaker YES/NO :

1a.Full Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

L : YES

C : YES

R : YES

SR : YES

SBR :

SBL :

YES

SL : YES

SW : YES

OK RETRY

Exit Cancel Exit Cancel

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.

• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection.

If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use

/

to select the speaker and

/

to change the setting and continue.

• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring

(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.

– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.

After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again.

– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and continue.

7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker

Distance, Standing Wave, Acoustic Cal EQ and Full Band

Phase Control.

Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.

8 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically.

Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.

The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using The

Advanced MCACC menu on page 106 or The system and the other setup on page 120.

Note

1 • For details on the speaker layout and the Surr Back System setting, see Determining the speakers’ application on page 21.

• If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker setting on page 121 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 5.

• If you have THX-certified speakers, select Return , then select Auto MCACC for the THX Speaker setting. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 107 for more on this.

2 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now

(you can rename it later in Data Management on page 118).

3 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY . Select Return , then select Auto MCACC to save other correction curves

(such as ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN ). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 107 for more on this.

4 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.

5 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.

6 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Checking MCACC Data on page 115 for more on this.

7 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 121.

• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 47 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic Setup

Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup

If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto

MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display, please follow them.

• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.

The Input Setup menu

You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings (see Input function default and possible settings on page 48). In this case, you need to tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you’ve connected.

SC-LX82:

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD

VIDEO1

USB iPod

PHONO

VIDEO2

MULTI CH

HDMI

DVR

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

SC-LX72:

SOURCE

TV CONTROL

VOL

INPUT

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

MUTE

TUNE

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

CH LEVEL

SOURCE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

T.EDIT

GUIDE

DVD BD DVR HDMI

PRESET

TV CD CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

INPUT

PRESET

TV/DTV MPX

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

PQLS

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.

Use  RECEIVER to switch on.

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your

TV. Use

///

and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu.

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU.

4 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.

4.SystemSetup

A/V RECEIVER a.Manual SP Setup b. Input Setup c. OSD Language d. Other Setup

4b.Input Setup

A/V RECEIVER

Input Name

Input Skip

Digital In

HDMI Input

Component In

12V Trigger1

12V Trigger2

Rename

OFF

COAX-1

- - -

Comp-1

OFF

Exit Return Exit Finish

5 Select the input function that you want to set up.

The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or VIDEO1 ) which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote control.

6 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your component.

For example, if your DVD player only has an optical output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s

Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical input you’ve connected it to. The numbering ( OPT-1 to 4 ) corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the back of the receiver.

• If your component is connected via a component video cable to an input terminal other than the default, you must tell the receiver which input terminal your component is connected to, or else you may see the S-Video or composite video signals instead of the component video signals.

7 When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for other inputs.

There are three optional settings in addition to the assignment of the input jacks:

• Input Name – You can choose to rename the input function for easier identification. Select Rename to do so, or Default to return to the system default.

• Input Skip – When set to ON , that input is skipped when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial. ( DVD and other inputs can be still be selected directly with the input function buttons.)

Note

1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 87), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 48 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic Setup

• 12V Trigger1/2 – After connecting a component to one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 40), select

MAIN , ZONE 2 , ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding trigger setting to switch it on automatically along with the (main or sub) zone specified.

4b.Input Setup

A/V RECEIVER

Input Name

Input Skip

Digital In

HDMI Input

Component In

12V Trigger1

12V Trigger2

Rename

OFF

COAX-1

- - -

Comp-1

OFF

Exit Finish

8 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the System Setup menu.

Input function default and possible settings

The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input functions. If you have connected components to this receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu on page 47 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up.

The dots (  ) indicate possible assignments.

Input function

DVD

TV/SAT

DVR

VIDEO1

VIDEO2

Digital

COAX-1

OPT-1

OPT-2

OPT-3

COAX-3 c

Input Terminals

HDMI

 a

( BD ) b

 a

Component

IN 1



IN 2

IN 3



HDMI 1

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

( HDMI-1 )

( HDMI-2 )

( HDMI-3 )

HDMI 4

( HDMI-4 ) b

HOME

MEDIA

GALLERY iPod/USB

CD-R/TAPE

TUNER

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

COAX-2

OPT-4

 a a.With KURO LINK set to ON , assignments cannot be made (see

KURO LINK on page 81).

b.This assignment is fixed and cannot be changed.

SC-LX82 only .  (assignment possible) for the SC-LX72.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 49 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic playback

Chapter 5:

Basic playback

Important

Playing a source

Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.

SC-LX82:

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

SOURCE iPod CTRL

STATUS

HOME

MENU

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

THX MPX PQLS

CH LEVEL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

CH VOL

VOL

SC-LX72:

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE MUTE

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

SOURCE

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

DVD

THX

STANDARD

MENU

ADV SURR

PHASE CTRL STATUS

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

AUDIO INFO CH

DISP

INPUT

SELECT

MULTI OPE

REMOTE

SETUP

TV CTRL

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC

HDMI OUT

SLEEP

1 Switch on your system components and receiver.

Start by switching on the playback component (for example a DVD player), your TV

and subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver (press  RECEIVER ).

• Make sure the setup microphone is disconnected.

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

3 Select the input function you want to play.

You can use the input function buttons on the remote control, INPUT SELECT , or the front panel INPUT

SELECTOR dial.

4 Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.

If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound

DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.

• See also Listening to your system on page 58 for information on different ways of listening to sources.

It is possible to check on the front panel display whether or not multi-channel playback is being performed properly.

When using a surround back speaker, 2 D+PLIIx

MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital 5.1 channel signals, and DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals.

When not using a surround back speaker, DOLBY

DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital 5.1 channel signals.

If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode, check the connections and settings.

5 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.

Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.

Playing a source with HDMI connection

• Use INPUT SELECT to select the HDMI input you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 1).

You can also perform the same operation by using the

INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing

HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.

Note

1 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO1 jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO1 input is now selected).

2 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 65).

3 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby

Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.

• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be set to a multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 59 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 50 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic playback

• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 85 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV or flat screen TV (no sound will be heard from this receiver).

• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, use an analog video connection.

• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s digital out jack.

• It is also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see

Switching the iPod controls on page 51.

2 SC-LX82 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

3 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

Loading appears in the GUI screen while the receiver verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.

When the display shows iPod top menu you’re ready to play music from the iPod.

Main Zone:

Selecting the multichannel analog inputs

If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs for surround sound playback.

1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the proper output setting.

For example, you might need to set your DVD player to output multichannel analog audio.

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then use INPUT SELECT to select MULTI CH IN.

You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel.

• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in Other Setup . For details, see Multi Channel Input

Setup on page 125.

Sub Zone:

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Podcasts

Genres

Composers

Audiobooks

1 / 9 iPod CTRL

Playlists iPod

1/9 iPod

A/V RECEIVER

]

Playing back audio files stored on an iPod

To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver.

You can also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver.

Playing an iPod

This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver.

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.

See Connecting an iPod on page 42.

Note

1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.

• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.

• With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 125.

2 • This system is compatible with the audio and video of the iPod nano, iPod fifth generation (audio only), iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone.

However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The system is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.

• Compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod and iPhone. Please be sure to use the latest available software version.

• iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.

• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.

• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.

• When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to a different track in the sub zone from the one playing in the main zone.

3 The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.

4 • Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as # .

• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod. To display video clips, switch iPod operation to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on page 51).

• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 51 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic playback

Finding what you want to play

When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name, album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to using your iPod directly.

1 Use

/

to select a category, then press ENTER to browse that category.

• To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN .

2 Use

/

to browse the selected category (e.g., albums).

• Use

/

to move to previous/next levels.

3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press  to start playback.

Main Zone:

Top Menu

PLAY xxxx/xxxx

3:02

Track Title

Artist Name

Album Title

-2:02

Shuffle Songs

Track number

Track title

Play mode

Artist name

Album title iPod CTRL iPod

Now Playing

Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx

Chapter Number : xxx/xxx

List

Playing time

File information

Sub Zone:

Play

Track Title xxxx/xxxx

Chap xxx/xxx

3:02

Shuffle Songs

-2:02

Ar tist Name

Album Title

Track number

File information

Track title

Play mode

Playing time

Artist name

Album title

Navigation through categories on your iPod looks like this:

Playlists



Songs

Artists  Albums  Songs

Albums



Songs

Podcasts

Genres



Artists



Albums



Songs

Composers



Albums



Songs

Audiobooks

Shuffle Songs

Basic playback controls

The following table shows the basic playback controls for your iPod. Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.

Button



What it does

Press to start playback.

If you start playback when something other than a song is selected, all the songs that fall into that category will play.

 Pauses/unpauses playback.

/ Press and hold during playback to start scanning.

/ Press to skip to previous/next track.

Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One ,

Repeat All and Repeat Off .

Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle

Songs , Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off .

DISP Press repeatedly to change the song playback information displayed in the front panel display.

ENTER When browsing, press to move to next levels.

During playback, press to set the play and pause modes.

RETURN





When browsing, press to move to previous levels.

When browsing, press to move to previous/next levels.

/

During Audiobook playback, press to switch the playback speed: Faster



Normal



Slower

TOP MENU Press to return to the iPod top menu screen.

Switching the iPod controls

You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod and the receiver.

1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.

This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become inactive.

2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver controls.

Tip

• You can play all of the songs in a particular category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list. For example, you can play all the songs by a particular artist.

Note

1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.

2 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.

3 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver. However, when video clips recorded on the iPod are played, the playback picture is displayed.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 52 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic playback

Playing a USB device

It is possible to playback files

using the USB interface on the front of this receiver.

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.

See Connecting a USB device on page 42.

2 SC-LX82 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

3 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

Loading appears in the GUI screen as this receiver starts recognizing the USB device connected.

When the display shows USB Top menu you’re ready to playback from the USB device.

Main Zone:

Sub Zone:

1 / 3

USB Top

A/V RECEIVER

Music

Photos

Slideshow Setup

USB Top

[

[ Photos

[ Slideshow Setup

1/3

]

Important

If an Over Current message lights in the display, the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this receiver. Try following the points below:

• Switch the receiver off, then on again.

• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off.

• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the device) for USB power.

If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB device is incompatible.

Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device

The maximum number of levels that you can select in

Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can display and play back up to 30 000 folders and files within a USB memory device.

1 Use

/

to select ‘Music’ from the USB Top menu.

USB Top

A/V RECEIVER

Music

Photos

Slideshow Setup

Top Menu

Folder1

Folder2

Folder3

Music1

Music2

Music3

Music4

Music5

Music

A/V RECEIVER

1 / 3

Return

2 Use

/

to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.

• To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN .

3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press  to start playback.

Main Zone:

Track number

Track title or File name

Top Menu

PLAY xxxx/xxxx

3:02

Track Title

Artist Name

Album Title

-2:02

Random On

Playing time

Play mode

Artist name

Album title

USB

Now Playing

Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx

Format : xxxxxxxxxxx

Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx

File information

Return

Note

1 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players

(MP3 players) of format FAT12/16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback.

• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.

2 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.

3 • When a USB memory device with a large capacity is connected, it may take some time to read all the contents.

• This receiver does not support a USB hub.

4 Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as # .

5 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.

• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the GUI screen instead; when neither the album name nor the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.

• Playback stops when the last song in a USB memory device is played back to the end.

• Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.

• DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.

• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 53 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic playback

Sub Zone:

Track title or File name

Play xxxx/xxxx

Track Title

Random On

3:02 -2:02

Ar tist Name

Album Title

Track number

Play mode

Playing time

Artist name

Album title

Basic playback controls

The following table shows the basic playback controls for your USB memory device. Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.

Button





/

What it does

Press to start playback.

Pauses/unpauses playback.

Press and hold during playback to start scanning.

/ Press to skip to previous/next track.

Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One ,

Repeat Folder , Repeat All and Repeat Off .

DISP

ENTER

Press repeatedly to switch between Random On and Random Off .

Press repeatedly to change the song playback information displayed in the front panel display.

When browsing, press to move to next levels.

During playback, press to set the play and pause modes.

RETURN

 / 

When browsing, press to move to previous levels.

When browsing, press to move to previous/next levels.

TOP MENU Press to return to the USB Top menu.

Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device

2 / 3

1 Use

/

to select ‘Photos’ from the USB Top menu.

USB Top

A/V RECEIVER

Music

Photos

Slideshow Setup

2 Use

/

to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.

• To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN .

3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press  to start playback.

The selected content is displayed in full screen and starts a slideshow.

After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles between play and pause (only when Theme on the

Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF) ).

Basic playback controls

Button What it does

ENTER ,  Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.

RETURN ,



Stops the Player and returns to the previous menu.

Displays the previous photo content.

 a

 a

 a

DISP a

Displays the next photo content.

Pauses/unpauses the slideshow.

Displays the photo information.

a.You can only use this button when Theme on the Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF) .

Slideshow Setup

Make the various settings for playing slideshows of photo files here.

1 Use

/

to select ‘Slideshow Setup’ from the USB

Top menu.

USB Top

A/V RECEIVER

Music

Photos

Slideshow Setup

Top Menu

Theme

Slideshow Setup

Music Select :

Folder1

A/V RECEIVER

: Normal(OFF)

Select

3 / 3

Return

2 Select the setting you want.

• Theme – Add various effects to the slideshow.

• Interval – Set the interval for switching the photos.

This may not be available depending on the Theme setting.

• BGM – Play music files stored on the USB device while displaying photos.

• Music Select – Select the folder containing the music files to be played when BGM is set to ON .

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the USB Top menu.

Note

1 Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.

2 If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for five minutes, the list screen reappears.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 54 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic playback

About playable file formats

The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.

Music files

Category Extension Stream

MP3 a .mp3

MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio Layer-3

WAV

WMA

.wav

.wma

LPCM

WMA8/9 b

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

8 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

8 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

8 bit, 16 bit

2 ch, Monaural

8 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

8 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported a.

“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.” b.Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,

Voice.

Photo files

Category Extension

JPEG .jpg

.jpeg

.jpe

.jif

.jfif

Format

Resolution

Meeting the following conditions:

• Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF format)

• Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4 a

, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0

30 to 8192 pixels vertical, 40 to 8192 pixels horizontal a.The maximum playable resolution for 4:4:4 is 5120 x 8192 pixels.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 55 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic playback

Listening to the radio

The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and

AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving station presets below for more on how to do this.

SC-LX82:

PGM MENU

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD

VIDEO1

USB iPod

PHONO

VIDEO2

MULTI CH

HDMI

DVR

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY

CD-R

INPUT SELECT

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

T.EDIT

GUIDE

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

STATUS

HOME

MENU

PHASE CTRL

RETURN

CH LEVEL

HDMI OUT

CLR

THX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STEREO

STANDARD ADV SURR

SC-LX72: iPod USB VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

INPUT

SELECT

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC

SBch

A.ATT

CH LEVEL

HDMI OUT

SLEEP

DIMMER

INPUT

MASTER

VOLUME

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

T.EDIT

GUIDE

RETURN

DIRECT

PGM

HDD

THX

STEREO

DVD

STANDARD

ADV SURR

PHASE CTRL STATUS

TV/DTV

AUDIO

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

RECEIVER

REMOTE

SETUP

INFO

PQLS

1 SC-LX82 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press TUNER to select the tuner.

3 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary.

Each press switches the band between FM and AM.

4 Tune to a station.

There are three ways to do this:

Automatic tuning – To search for stations in the currently selected band, press and hold TUNE

/ for about a second. The receiver will start searching for the next station, stopping when it has found one.

Repeat to search for other stations.

Manual tuning – To change the frequency one step at a time, press TUNE

/

High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE

/

for high speed tuning. Release the button at the frequency you want.

Improving FM sound

If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press

MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode.

This should improve the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.

Using the noise cut mode

The two noise cut modes can be used when receiving AM broadcasts. Press MPX to select the noise cut mode (1 to

2).

Using Neural THX

This feature uses Neural Surround™, THX

technologies to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.

• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT for Neural THX listening.

See About Neural – THX Surround on page 143 for more on this.

The Neural THX mode can be selected also with

STANDARD (page 59).

Tuning directly to a station

Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on the remote control.

1 SC-LX82 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press TUNER to select the tuner.

3 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary.

Each press switches the band between FM and AM.

4 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).

5 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.

For example, to tune to 106.00

(FM), press 1 , 0 , 6 , 0 , 0 .

If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS

twice to cancel the frequency and start over.

Saving station presets

If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.

This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each. When saving an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see page 55) is also stored.

1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.

See Listening to the radio above for more on this.

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET MEMORY , then a blinking memory class.

3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press PRESET

/

to select the station preset you want.

You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 56 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic playback

4 Press ENTER.

After pressing ENTER , the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station.

Naming station presets

For easier identification, you can name your station presets.

1 Choose the station preset you want to name.

See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET NAME , then a blinking cursor at the first character position.

3 Input the name you want.

Choose from the following characters for a name up to eight characters long.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

0123456789

!”#$%&’()

∗

+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]

Use

/

to select a character,

/

to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

Listening to station presets

You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See

Saving station presets on page 55 if you haven’t done this already.

1 SC-LX82 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press TUNER to select the tuner.

3 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station is stored.

Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.

4 Press PRESET

/

to select the station preset you want.

• You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the station preset.

An introduction to RDS

Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of information—the name of the station and the kind of show they’re broadcasting, for example.

One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of program. For example, you can search for a station that’s broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ .

You can search the following program types:

NEWS – News

AFFAIRS – Current Affairs

INFO – General Information

SPORT – Sport

EDUCATE – Educational

DRAMA – Radio plays, etc.

CULTURE – National or regional culture, theater, etc.

SCIENCE – Science and technology

VARIED – Usually talk-based material, such as quiz shows or interviews.

POP M – Pop music

ROCK M – Rock music

EASY M – Easy listening

LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical music

CLASSICS – ‘Serious’ classical music

OTHER M – Music not fitting above categories

WEATHER – Weather reports

FINANCE – Stock market reports, commerce, trading, etc.

CHILDREN – Programs for children

SOCIAL – Social affairs

RELIGION – Programs concerning religion

PHONE IN – Public expressing their views by phone

TRAVEL – Holiday-type travel rather than traffic announcements

LEISURE – Leisure interests and hobbies

JAZZ – Jazz

COUNTRY – Country music

NATION M – Popular music in a language other than English

OLDIES – Popular music from the

’50s and ’60s

FOLK M – Folk music

DOCUMENT – Documentary

Tip

• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name.

• Once you have named a station preset, you can press

DISP when listening to a station to switch the display between name and frequency.

Searching for RDS programs

One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to search for a particular kind of radio program. You can search for any of the program types listed above.

1 SC-LX82 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press TUNER to select the FM band.

3 Press PTY SEARCH.

PTY SEARCH shows in the display.

4 Press PRESET

/

to select the program type you want to hear.

5 Press ENTER to search for the program type.

The system starts searching through all frequency for a match. When it finds one, the search stops and the station plays for five seconds.

6 If you want to keep listening to the station, press

ENTER within the five seconds.

If you don’t press ENTER , searching resumes.

If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find that program type at the time of the search.

Note

1 In addition, there are two other program types, TEST and NONE . You can’t search for these.

2 RDS is only possible in the FM band.

3 RDS searches all frequency. If the program type could not be found among all frequency, NO PTY is displayed.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 57 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Basic playback

Displaying RDS information

Use the DISP button to display the different types of RDS information available.

• Press DISP for RDS information.

Each press changes the display as follows:

• Radio Text ( RT ) – Messages sent by the radio station.

For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone number as RT.

• Program Service Name ( PS ) – The name of the radio station.

• Program Type ( PTY ) – This indicates the kind of program currently being broadcast.

• Current tuner frequency.

Note

1 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.

• If you see NO RT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station.

• If you see NO PS DATA in the PS display, it means no PS data can be received.

• If you see NO PTY DATA in the PTY display, it means no PTY data can be received.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 58 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Listening to your system

Chapter 6:

Listening to your system

Important

• The listening modes and many features described in this section may not be available depending on the current source, settings and status of the receiver.

Auto playback

There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.

SC-LX82: iPod CTRL

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

SOURCE

THX MPX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

CH VOL

VOL

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

TVCONTROL

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

D SP

SC-LX72:

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT)

for auto playback of a source.

AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before showing the decoding or playback format. Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.

• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display.

• When listening to the FM Radio or the Neural THX feature is selected automatically (see Using Neural

THX on page 55 for more on this).

ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels.

OPTIMUM SURR – In the Optimum Surround mode, this receiver automatically optimizes sound balance in each scene based on actually set volume. The sound balancer controls three major theater sound elements dialogue, bass and surround with original algorithm.

Tip

• When an ALC is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the

Audio options on page 85.

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

DVD

STANDARD

MENU

ADV SURR

THX PHASE CTRL STATUS

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

Note

1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround sound on page 59 for more on these decoding formats).

• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.

2 • For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 62.

• The AUTO SURROUND mode cannot be selected in the following cases:

– When headphones are plugged in (except ALC ).

– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.

– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 85.

3 Neural THX is selected when Neural Radio is accessed with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input. However, Stereo is selected when a category other than Neural Radio is accessed.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 59 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Listening to your system

Listening in surround sound

Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However, the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.

If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using surround back channel processing on page 63.

Standard surround sound

The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources.

SC-LX82: iPod CTRL

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

SOURCE

THX MPX

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

PQLS

CH VOL

VOL

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

TV CONTROL

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

SC-LX72:

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

HDD

STEREO

DVD

THX PHASE CTRL

MENU

ADV SURR

STATUS

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press STANDARD

(STANDARD SURROUND).

If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.

With two channel sources , you can select from

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially suited to movie sources

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources

• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially suited to video games

• 2 Pro Logic – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound from the surround speakers is mono)

• Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound, especially suited to movie sources

• Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources

• Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources

With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON , you can select (according to format):

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available when you’re using two surround back speakers)

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above

• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital

Surround EX)

• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS-ES encoded sources

• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS encoded sources

Note

1 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.

2 The STANDARD listening mode cannot be selected in the following cases:

– When headphones are plugged in.

– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.

– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 85.

3 If surround back channel processing (page 63) is switched OFF , or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if the Surround back speaker setting on page 121 is set to anything but Normal ), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).

4 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH

DIMENSION and PANORAMA . See Setting the Audio options on page 85 to adjust them.

5 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 85).

6 Neural THX can be selected for 2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or analog 2-channel sources.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 60 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Listening to your system

Using the Home THX modes

THX and Home THX are technical standards created by

THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX is designed to make home theater audio sound more like what you hear in a cinema.

Different THX options will be available depending on the source and the setting for surround back channel processing (see Using surround back channel processing on page 63 for more on this).

SC-LX82:

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

RETURN

CH LEVEL

SOURCE

MPX PQLS

CH VOL

VOL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

TVCONTROL

SC-LX72:

PGM

HDD DVD

PHASE CTRL STATUS

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press THX (HOME THX) to select a listening mode.

With two channel sources , press THX repeatedly to select a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode

(see Using surround back channel processing on page 63 for an explanation of each process):

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA

• 2 Pro Logic+THX CINEMA

• Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC

• Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC

• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES

• THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMES

With multichannel sources , press THX (HOME THX) repeatedly to select from:

• THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel sources

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA

• THX Ultra2/Select2 CINEMA

– Allows you to hear

7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel sources

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC

• THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSIC 2

– This mode is suited not only for sources recorded in Dolby Digital and DTS, but also to all multi-channel music sources (DVD-

Audio, etc.).

• THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMES

– This mode is suited to playing the sound of games.

Using the Advanced surround effects

The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced

Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.

SC-LX82: iPod CTRL

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

SOURCE

THX MPX

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

PQLS

CH VOL

VOL

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

TVCONTROL

Note

1 • When the function is set to TUNER , iPod/USB , PHONO or HOME MEDIA GALLERY , it is not possible to select 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX

GAMES or THX Ultra2/Select2 GAME .

• The THX mode cannot be selected in the following cases:

– When headphones are plugged in.

– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.

– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 85.

• When playing an SACD, 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC , Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC and THX Ultra2/Select2 MUSIC can be selected.

• If the settings other than Front and SW (Subwoofer) are set to NO at Speaker Setting, only THX CINEMA , THX MUSIC and THX GAMES can be selected.

2 • Ultra2 for the SC-LX82, Select2 for the SC-LX72.

• Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.

3 THX CINEMA , THX MUSIC and THX GAMES can be selected when surround back processing is set to SBch OFF , when there is no surround back speaker, or when playing 6.1- and 7.1-channel sources.

4 When playing DTS-encoded sources, Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA can be selected, not THX Surround EX .

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 61 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Listening to your system

SC-LX72:

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

HDD

STEREO

DVD

THX

STANDARD

MENU

ADV SURR

PHASE CTRL STATUS

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press ADV SURR (ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a listening mode.

• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks

• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog

• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of special effects

• MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from mono soundtracks

• ENT.SHOW

– Suitable for musical sources

• EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field

• TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both mono and stereo TV sources

• ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games

• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs

• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound

• ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock and/or pop music

• UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources

• EXT.STEREO

– Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source, using all of your speakers

• PHONES SURR – When listening through headphones, you can still get the effect of overall surround.

Listening in stereo

When you select STEREO , you will hear the source through just the front left and right speakers (and possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.

SC-LX82: iPod CTRL

STATUS

MENU

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

SOURCE

THX

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

MPX PQLS

STANDARD ADV SURR

CH VOL

VOL

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

TVCONTROL

SC-LX72:

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

HDD

THX

STANDARD

PHASE CTRL

MENU

ADV SURR

STATUS

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press STEREO for stereo playback.

Press repeatedly to switch between:

• STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround settings and you can still use the Midnight,

Loudness, and Tone functions.

• F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround

Advance on page 62 for more on this.

• F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround

Advance on page 62 for more on this.

Tip

• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the

EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 85.

Note

1 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup.

For more on this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 63.

• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURR mode will automatically be selected.

2 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).

3 The STEREO mode cannot be selected in the following cases:

– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.

– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 85.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 62 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Listening to your system

Using Front Stage Surround Advance

The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to create natural surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer.

SC-LX82: iPod CTRL

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

SOURCE

THX

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

MPX PQLS

STANDARD ADV SURR

CH VOL

VOL

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

TVCONTROL

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

SC-LX72:

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

HDD

THX

STANDARD

PHASE CTRL

MENU

ADV SURR

STATUS

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press STEREO to select

Front Stage Surround Advance modes.

• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on this.

• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges.

• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.

FOCUS position

(Recommended)

Front left speaker

Front right speaker

WIDE

Front left speaker

position

Front right speaker

Using Stream Direct

Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog or digital sound source.

SC-LX82: iPod CTRL

MENU

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

SOURCE

THX MPX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

CH VOL

VOL

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

SC-LX72:

TVCONTROL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

DVD

STANDARD

MENU

ADV SURR

THX PHASE CTRL STATUS

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select the mode you want.

Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.

Note

1 The Front Stage Surround Advance mode cannot be selected in the following cases:

– When headphones are plugged in.

– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.

– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 85.

2 When using F.S.SURR WIDE , a better effect can be obtained if the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced MCACC is performed. For more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45.

3 The Stream Direct mode cannot be selected in the following cases:

– When headphones are plugged in (except PURE DIRECT ).

– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.

– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 85.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 63 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Listening to your system

• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 58.

• ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode (page 58).

• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay and hi-bit/hi-sampling (SC-LX72 only) settings. You will hear sources according to the number of channels in the signal.

• PURE DIRECT – Analog sources are heard without any digital processing.

No sound is output from the

Speaker B in this mode.

• OPTIMUM SURR – Listening in Optimum Surround mode (page 58).

Using surround back channel processing

• Default setting: SBch ON

You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1 decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby

Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use

6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back channel will be generated, but the material may sound better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround back channel processing off).

• With a 7.1-channel surround system, audio signals that have undergone matrix decoding processing through surround back channel processing to which the Up Mix function is added are output from the surround back speakers.

SC-LX82:

SOURCE

TVCONTROL

VOL

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

A.ATT

D.ACCESS

MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

CLASS

ENTER

SC-LX72:

SELECT

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC

D.ACCESS

/CLR

HDMI OUT

SLEEP

A.ATT

DIMMER

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

INPUT

MASTER

VOLUME

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the surround back channel options.

Each press cycles through the options as follows:

• SBch ON – Matrix decoding processing for generating the surround back component from the surround component is turned on.

• SBch AUTO – Matrix decoding processing for generating the surround back component from the surround component is switched automatically.

Matrix decoding processing is only performed when surround back channel signals are detected in the input signals.

• SBch OFF – Matrix decoding processing for generating the surround back component from the surround component is turned off.

Using the Virtual Surround Back mode

• Default setting: OFF

When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information, or if the material sounds better in the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.

• Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the virtual surround back channel options.

Each press cycles through the options as follows:

• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used

(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)

• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)

• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is switched off

Note

1 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this is a problem.

2 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the THX, stereo, Front

Stage Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.

• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO or if Front Bi-Amp , Speaker

B or ZONE 2 is selected at Surr Back System .

• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 64 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Listening to your system

Setting the Up Mix function

In a 7.1-channel surround system with surround speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening position, the surround sound of 5.1-channel sources is heard from the side. The Up Mix function mixes the sound of the surround speakers with the surround back speakers so that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the rear as it should be.

• Using the Up Mix function is effective when the speakers in the 7.1-channel surround system are set up as recommended in the example on page 22.

• Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source, in some cases it may not be possible to achieve good results. In this case, set the setting to

OFF .

Up Mix OFF

SW C

Up Mix ON

SW C

SBL

SBR

INPUT

SELECTOR



STANDBY/ON

PHASE

CONTROL

ADVANCED

MCACC

SBL

PQLS HDMI

SBR

MASTER

VOLUME

Selecting MCACC presets

• Default setting: MEMORY 1

If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions

, you can switch between settings to suit the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting

(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

SC-LX82:

PGM MENU

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

SOURCE

TV CONTROL

VOL

A.ATT

SBch

HDMI OUT

INFO

DISP

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

SC-LX72:

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

INPUT

SELECT

SIGNAL SEL

SBch

D.ACCESS

/CLR

HDMI OUT

SLEEP

A.ATT

DIMMER

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press MCACC.

Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets

See Data Management on page 118 to check and manage your current settings.

AUDIO PARAMETER

(TUNE)

VIDEO

(PRESET) ENTER

HOME MENU

(TUNE)

(PRESET)

TUNER EDIT BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

HOME

THX

STANDARD

SURROUND

ADVANCED

SURROUND

STEREO iPod iPhone

RETURN

HDMI 4

VIDEO CAMERA

USB

CONTROL ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE SPEAKERS

MCACC

SETUP MIC PHONES

1 Switch the receiver into standby.

2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press  STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET  NO  .

Use

/

to select UP MIX  ON  , and then use

/ to select ON or OFF .

3 Press ENTER to confirm.

• When set to ON , the UP MIX indicator on the front panel lights.

Note

1 • Set to ON regardless of this setting when playing DTS-HD signals.

• May automatically be set to OFF even when set to ON , depending on the input signal and listening mode.

2 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.

These presets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45 or Automatic

MCACC (Expert) on page 107, either of which you should have already completed.

3 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.

• You can also press

/

to select the MCACC preset.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 65 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Listening to your system

Choosing the input signal

On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals for the different inputs as described below.

SC-LX82:

THX MPX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

SOURCE

DIMMER AUDIO

– DTS HD lights with DTS-HD decoding.

– MSTR lights with DTS-HD Master Audio decoding.

– 96/24 lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.

– WMA9 Pro lights to indicate that a WMA9 Pro signal is being decoded.

• HDMI is not assigned by default. To select an HDMI signal, conduct the input setup procedure (see The

Input Setup menu on page 47).

SC-LX72:

TVCONTROL

VOL

SBch

D.ACCESS

/CLR

INPUT

SELECT

MCACC

HDMI OUT

SLEEP

A.ATT

DIMMER

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

Better sound using Phase Control and

Full Band Phase Control

This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions that correct phase distortion and group delay: Phase

Control and Full Band Phase Control. Activating Full

Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it also involves the effects of Phase Control. For details on each of these two features, refer to the following explanations.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal corresponding to the source component.

Each press cycles through the options as follows:

• AUTO – The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order: HDMI ; DIGITAL ; ANALOG .

• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.

• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.

• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.

• PCM – For PCM input signals.

The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order: HDMI ;

DIGITAL .

When set to DIGITAL , HDMI or AUTO (only selected

DIGITAL or HDMI ), the indicators light according to the signal being decoded, as follows:

– 2 DIGITAL lights with Dolby Digital decoding.

– 2 DIGITAL PLUS lights with Dolby Digital Plus decoding.

– 2 TrueHD lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding.

– DTS lights with DTS decoding.

Using Phase Control

During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency

Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each channel are assigned to the subwoofer or the other most appropriate speaker. At least in theory, however, this type of processing involves a group delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase distortion where the lowfrequency sound is delayed or muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the quality of the original sound (see illustration below).

Phase Control OFF

Sound source

Front speaker

Subwoofer

Listening position

Sound muffled due to a delay in time

• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear

• Bass sound with loss of depth

• Sound of musical instruments with no reality

Note

1 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96/24) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats.

The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA9 Pro, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio (including 192 kHz). With other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the

MULTI CH IN , TUNER and PHONO ).

• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections (page 34) and set the signal input to DIGITAL .

• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.

2 When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH , the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.

3 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.

• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 66 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Listening to your system

Phase Control ON

Front speaker

Listening position

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to select

PHASE CONTROL.

The indicator on the front panel lights.

Sound source Subwoofer

• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity

• Bass sound with no loss of depth

Original sound preserved with no loss of clarity

• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality

Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching

for an optimal sound image at your listening position. The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase

Control switched on for all sound sources.

SC-LX82:

SC-LX72:

SOURCE

TV CONTROL

VOL

PGM

HDD

THX

TV/DTV

REMOTE

SETUP

VOL

DVD

MPX

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

STATUS

HOME

MENU

PQLS

THX

STATUS

MPX

TUNE

PQLS

PRESET

RETURN

CH LEVEL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

Using Full Band Phase Control

The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected.

Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency bands output from a speaker system consisting of multiple speakers (in case of typical three-way speakers, for instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and lowfrequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics across wide ranges, there are cases where the group delay characteristics are not effectively flattened. This phase distortion of the speakers subsequently causes group delay (the delay of lowfrequency sound against high-frequency sound) during audio signal playback.

This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals output from the speakers with the supplied microphone, therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase characteristics during audio signal playback

– the same correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers.

This correction minimizes group delay between the ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase characteristics across all ranges.

Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase characteristics between channels ensure better surround sound integration for multichannel setting.

Note

1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper section of the diagram above), then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.

• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.

• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE

CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.

• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.

• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.

• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:

– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.

– When the MULTI CH IN input is selected.

– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 85.

2 To calibrate and analyze the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, either follow the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced

MCACC (see Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45), or set Auto MCACC menu under Auto MCACC under Advanced MCACC to Full Band Phase Ctrl . Select ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC with Auto MCACC menu. Upon calibration of the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, the Full Band Phase Ctrl feature is automatically switched on. Note that FULLBAND PHASE cannot be selected unless the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers are calibrated.

3 The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed graphically in the GUI screen (see Using Full Band Phase Control on page 66). Also, when your PC is connected to this receiver, the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC (see Output PC on page 117).

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 67 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Listening to your system

Full Band Phase Control OFF

Tweeter

Midrange

Woofer

Tweeter

Midrange

Woofer

Group Delay Characteristics ms

Sound in the middle- and low-frequency ranges is delayed against the high-frequency sound due to group delay.

Full Band Phase Control ON

SC-LX82:

SOURCE

VOL

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

STATUS

HOME

MENU

TUNE

PRESET

RETURN

CH LEVEL

THX MPX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

TV CONTROL

SC-LX72:

PGM

HDD

THX

DVD

STATUS

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to select

FULLBAND PHASE.

Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control functions are switched on. The FULL BAND and indicator, on the front panel lights.

Group Delay Characteristics ms

With the phase distortion corrected, the frequency-phase characteristics are improved across all ranges.

• Sound with live dynamics

• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality

• Sound so accurately reproduced that you can even hear the lip movement of the singer

• Speech heard with no loss of clarity

• Surround sound with excellent integration

Note

1 The Full Band Phase Ctrl mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:

– When headphones are plugged in.

– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.

– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.

– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 85.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 68 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Chapter 7:

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Enjoying the Home Media Gallery

This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function allows you to listen to audio files or listen to Internet radio stations on a computer or other component connected to the receiver’s LAN terminal. This chapter describes the connection, setup, and playback procedures required to enjoy these features. It is advisory that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component.

Features of Home Media Gallery

This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you can enjoy the following features by connecting your components to these terminals.

• Playback the music files stored in PCs

You can playback a lot of music stored in your PCs using this unit.



See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 71 and Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 72.

• Listening to Internet radio stations

You can select and listen to your favorite Internet radio station from the list of Internet radio stations created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer products.



See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 71 and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 72.

• Listening to Neural THX internet radio or Neural

Music Direct



See Listening to Neural Music Direct on page 74.

Steps to enjoy the Home Media Gallery

Playing back audio files on the network and listening to Internet radio stations

1 Connect to the network through LAN interface.

See Connecting to the network through LAN interface on page 69 for more on this.

2 Configure the network settings.

The setup is necessary only when the router to be connected does not have the built-in DHCP server function.

See Setting up the network on page 76 for more on this.

3 Playback with Home Media Gallery.

See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 71 for more on this.

Note

1 Besides a PC, you can also play back audio files stored on your other components with the built-in media server function based on DLNA 1.0 framework and protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks and audio systems).

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 69 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Connecting to the network through

LAN interface

Caution

• Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.

• Illustration shows the SC-LX82, however connections for the SC-LX72 are the same except where noted.

HDMI

OUT

(KURO

LINK )

OUT

ASSIGNABLE

1 3

IN 3

(VIDEO 2)

IN 1

(TV/SAT)

IN 2

(DVR)

IN 3

(VIDEO1)

IN 4

(CD-R)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT 1

OUT 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1 (DVD)

12 V

TRIG

(OU

12V

TOT

IN 2 (CD)

CON

Internet

Router

Modem

LAN

3 2 1 WAN

RSto LAN port

LAN cable

(sold separately)

Introduction

The Home Media Gallery allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area

Network (LAN) as the receiver. This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following:

• PCs running Microsoft Windows XP with Windows

Media Connect installed

• PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with

Windows Media Player 11 installed

• DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on PCs or other components)

To play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations, you must turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary to set up the network manually. Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. See

Setting up the network on page 76 for more on this.

to LAN port

PC1 PC2

By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can play back audio files stored on components on the network, including your PC, and listen to Internet radio stations.

Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher).

Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary set up the network manually. For details, see Setting up the network on page 76.

The specifications of a LAN terminal

LAN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet jack

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Note

1 • To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.

• Photo or video files cannot be played back.

• With Windows Media Connect or Windows Media Player 11, you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 70 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

About network playback

The network playback function of this unit uses the following technologies:

Windows Media Player

See Windows Media Player 11/ Windows Media Connect on page 80 for more on this.

Windows Media DRM

Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights Management

(WMDRM) is a platform to protect and securely deliver content for playback on computers, portable devices and network devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a

WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM protected content can only be played on media servers supporting

WMDRM.

Content owners use WMDRM technology to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content.

Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade.

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of

Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

DLNA

DLNA CERTIFIED™ Audio Player

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a crossindustry organization of consumer electronics, computing industry and mobile device companies.

Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home.

The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability

Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability

Guidelines v1.0.

When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this player, some setting changes of software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for more information.

DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of

Digital Living Network Alliance.

Content playable over a network

• Even when encoded in a compatible format, some files may not play correctly.

• Movie or Photo files cannot be played back.

• There are cases where you cannot listen to an

Internet radio station even if the station can be selected from a list of radio stations.

• Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used.

• Supported file formats vary by server. As such, files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit. For more information check with the manufacturer of your server.

About playback behavior over a network

• Playback may stall when the PC is switched off or any media files stored on it are deleted while playing content.

• If there are problems within the network environment

(heavy network traffic, etc.) content may not be displayed or played properly (playback may be interrupted or stalled). For best performance, a

100BASE-TX connection between player and PC is recommended.

• If several clients are playing simultaneously, as the case may be, playback is interrupted or stalled.

• Depending on the security software installed on a connected PC and the setting of such software, network connection may be blocked.

Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player and/or the Home Media Gallery features due to communication error/malfunctions associated with your network connection and/or your PC, or other connected equipment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or

Internet service provider.

“Windows Media™” is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft

Licensing, Inc.

Microsoft

, Windows

Vista, Windows

XP, Windows

2000,

Windows

Millennium Edition, Windows

98, and WindowsNT

are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Authorizing this receiver

In order to be able to play with Home Media Gallery, this receiver must be authorized. This happens automatically when the receiver makes a connection over the network to the PC. If not, please authorize this receiver manually on the PC. The authorization (or permission) method for access varies depending on the type of server currently being connected. For more information on authorizing this receiver, refer to the instruction manual of your server.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 71 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Sub Zone:

Playback with Home Media Gallery

SC-LX82:

RECEIVER

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

TV DVR DVD BD

VIDEO1

USB iPod

PHONO

VIDEO2

MULTI CH

HDMI

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

VOL

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

RECEIVER

VOL

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

STATUS

HOME

MENU

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

RETURN

CH LEVEL

MUTE

SC-LX72:

DVD BD DVR HDMI

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

T.EDIT

GUIDE

CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY TV CD

PRESET PRESET iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

INPUT

SELECT

HDMI OUT

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

RETURN

Important

• When you play back audio files, ‘Connecting...’ is displayed before playback starts. The display may continue for several seconds depending on the type of file.

• In case a domain is configured in a Windows network environment, you cannot access a PC on the network while you are logged onto the domain. Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine.

• There are cases where the time elapsed may not be correctly displayed.

1 SC-LX82 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to select Home

Media Gallery as the input function.

It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network. The following screen appears when the Home

Media Gallery is selected as the input function. The number next to indicates the number of connected servers.

Main Zone:

Top Menu

A/V RECEIVER

Internet Radio

Neural Music Direct

******

Favorites

Recently Played

Setup

1/6

TOP MENU

Internet Radio

[ Neural Music Direct

******

[ Recently Played

[ Setup

1/6

Server

Now Playing

Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx

Format : xxxxxxxxxxx

Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx

Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx

Return

]

The server without the mark cannot be accessed.

3 Use

/

to select the category you want to play back, and then press ENTER.

Select a category from the following list:

• Internet Radio – Internet radio

• Neural Music Direct – Internet radio that supports

Neural Surround

•

Server Name

– Server components on the network

• Favorites – Favorite songs currently being registered

• Recently played – Internet Radio listening history

(most recent 20 incidents)

Depending on the selected category, the names of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are displayed.

4 Use

/

to select the folder, music files or Internet radio station to play back, and then press ENTER.

Press

/

to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item. When you press ENTER , playback starts with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item. To return to the list screen, press RETURN .

• In case of a server

Top Menu

Folder1

Folder2

Folder3

Music1

Music2

Music3

Music4

Music5

******

A/V RECEIVER

Return



Top Menu

PLAY

Track Title

3:02

Artist Name

Album Title

-2:02

Random On

Note

1 When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds while the list screen is displayed.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 72 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

• In case of Internet radio

Top Menu

Folder1

Folder2

Folder3

Folder4

Music1

Music2

Music3

Music4

Internet Radio

A/V RECEIVER

Return



Top Menu

PLAY

Track Title

3:02

Artist Name

Channel Name

-2:02

Random On

Internet Radio

Now Playing

Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx

Format : xxxxxxxxxxx

Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx

Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx

Return

Only audio files with the mark can be played. In case of the folders with the mark, use

/

and ENTER to select the desired folder and audio files.

5 Repeat step 4 to play back the desired song.

For detailed operating instructions, refer to the section shown below.

• Internet radio stations – See Listening to Internet radio stations below.

• Neural Music Direct – See Listening to Neural Music

Direct on page 74.

• Server – See Playing back audio files stored on components on the network below.

Playing back audio files stored on components on the network

About the playback screen

The following screen appears when you play back audio files. Note that some items may not be displayed depending on the type of file.

Main Zone:

Top Menu

PLAY

Track Title

3:02

Artist Name

Album Title

-2:02

Random On

Track title

Play mode

Artist name or File name

Album title

Server

Now Playing

Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx

Format : xxxxxxxxxxx

Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx

Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx

Playing time

File information

Return

Sub Zone:

Play

Track Title

3:02

Ar tist Name

Album Title

-2:02

Track title

Play mode

Playing time

Artist name or File name

Album title

You can perform the following operations with the remote control of this receiver. Note that some buttons are not available for operation depending on the category currently being played back.

Button



Function

Press to start playback.

If you start playback when something other than a song is selected, all the songs that fall into that category will play.

 Pauses playback.

 Stops playback.

/ Press to skip to previous/next song.

Press repeatedly to switch among Repeat One ,

Repeat All and Repeat Off (available only during playback).

 / 

Press repeatedly to switch between Random On and Random Off (available only during playback).

When browsing, press to move to previous/next levels.

DISP

ENTER

Press repeatedly to change the song playback information displayed in the front panel display. (If the list screen is displayed, switch to the playback screen.)

When browsing, press to move to next levels.

During playback, press to set the play and pause modes.

TOP MENU Press to return to the Top Menu screen.

RETURN Press to return to the previous level.

Listening to Internet radio stations

About Internet radio

Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of

Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world. Some are hosted, managed, and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or

OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are accessible from anywhere in the world, as long as there

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 73 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

07 is a connection to the Internet, as services are not transmitted through the air but are delivered over the

World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre as well as by region.

About the playback screen

The following screen appears when audio streams from an Internet radio station are received.

Main Zone:

Top Menu

PLAY

Track Title

3:02

Artist Name

Channel Name

-2:02

Random On

Internet Radio

Now Playing

Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx

Format : xxxxxxxxxxx

Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx

Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx

Sub Zone:

Play

Track Title

3:02

Ar tist Name

Channel Name

Return

Playing time

File information

-2:02

Track title

Play mode

Playing time

Artist name

Channel name

About list of Internet radio

Track title

Play mode

Artist name

Channel name

The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with this receiver. For details about vTuner, see vTuner on page 79.

Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations

You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio stations. See Advanced operations for Internet radio on page 76 for more on this.

Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner list from the special Pioneer site

With the receiver, broadcast stations not included on the list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered and played. Check the access code required for registration on the receiver, use this access code to access the special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the desired broadcast stations in your favorites. The address of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is: http://www.radio-pioneer.com

1 Display the Internet Radio list screen.

To display the Internet Radio list screen, perform steps 1 to 3 at Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 71.

2 Use

/

to select ‘Help’, then press ENTER.

Top Menu

Folder25

Folder26

Folder27

Folder28

Folder29

Folder30

Folder31

Help

Internet Radio

A/V RECEIVER

Return

3 Use

/

to select ‘Get access code’, then press

ENTER.

The access code required for registration on the special

Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Make a memo of this address.

Top Menu

Help

A/V RECEIVER

Registration help

Get access code

Show Your WebID/PW

Reset Your WebID/PW

FAQ

Top Menu

Get access code

A/V RECEIVER access code

ABC1234

Return Return

The following can be checked on the Help screen:

• Get access code – The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed.

• Show Your WebID/PW – After registering on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the registered ID and password are displayed.

• Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the information registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site.

When reset, all the registered broadcast stations are also cleared. If you want to listen to the same stations, re-register after resetting.

Note

1 • To listen to Internet radio stations, you must have high-speed broadband Internet access. With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.

• The port number varies depending on the Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.

• A list of Internet radio stations provided by the vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons.

• Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 74 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from your computer and perform the registration process.

http://www.radio-pioneer.com

Access the above site and use the access code in step 3 to perform user registration, following the instructions on the screen.

5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your favorites, following the instructions on the computer’s screen.

Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list and stations on the vTuner list can be registered. In this case they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can be played.

Listening to Neural Music Direct

About Neural Music Direct

Neural Music Direct is an Internet radio station managed and operated by Neural THX. Neural radio stations deliver multichannel surround sound. The Neural-THX Surround mode is automatically selected and lets you enjoy a rich multichannel surround sound experience. For details about Neural THX, see the operation manual supplied separately.

Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation,

Playing back your favorite songs

About the Favorites folder

You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs or Internet radio stations in the Favorites folder. Note that only the audio files stored on components on the network can be registered.

Registering and deleting audio files and Internet radio stations in and from the Favorites folder

Press PGM while a song is being played back or stopped.

The selected song is then registered in the Favorites folder.

Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be registered.

To delete a registered song, select the Favorites folder, select the song you want to delete from the folder, and press CLR . The selected song is then deleted from the

Favorites folder.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 75 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

About playable file formats

The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the compatibility of file formats varies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server.

Music files

Category Extension Stream

MP3 a .mp3

MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3

LPCM

WAV

WMA

AAC

FLAC

— b

.wav

.wma

.m4a

.aac

.3gp

.3g2

.flac

LPCM

WMA2/7/8

WMA9

MPEG-4 AAC LC

MPEG-4 HE AAC

(aacPlus v1/2)

FLAC

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

Sampling frequency

Quantization bitrate

Channel

Bitrate

VBR/CBR

8 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

8 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

8 kHz to 44.1 kHz

16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit

2 ch

8 kHz to 44.1 kHz

16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit

2 ch

8 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

5 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

8 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

5 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

32 kHz to 48 kHz

16 bit

2 ch

16 kbps to 320 kbps

Supported/Supported

8 kHz, 16 kHz, 22 kHz,

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

8 bit, 16 bit

2 ch (8-bit monaural audio is not supported)

—

Not supported/Supported a.

“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.” b.Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 76 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Advanced operations for Internet radio

SC-LX82:

VOL

RECEIVER

VOL

INPUT

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

MUTE

TUNE

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

RETURN

CH LEVEL

TVCONTROL

SC-LX72:

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLR

SIGNAL SEL

SBch

D.ACCESS

/CLR

MCACC

A.ATT

SLEEP

DIMMER

CH LEVEL

ENTER

INPUT

MASTER

VOLUME

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

T.EDIT

GUIDE

TV CONTROL

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

PRESET

RETURN

CH VOL

MUTE

Saving Internet radio stations

This receiver can remember the Internet radio stations that you often listen to in seven classes (A to G) with up to nine stations in each class to make the total of 63 stations at its maximum capacity.

Before proceeding with the following steps, check whether you have followed Steps 2 to 4 on page 71.

1 SC-LX82 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Tune into the Internet radio station that you want to save.

Tune into the desired Internet radio station by following

Steps 2 to 4 on page 71.

3 Press T.EDIT to switch to the station-saving mode.

4 Press CLASS to select the class that you want to save the station in.

Select the desired class from A to G.

5 Use

/

to select the number that you want to save the station as, and then press ENTER.

You can also select the station number by using the number buttons. Select the desired number from 1 to 9.

Retrieving saved Internet radio stations

You need to save Internet radio stations first before retrieving them. If there are no Internet radio stations currently being saved, see Saving Internet radio stations above and save at least one Internet radio station before proceeding with the following steps.

1 SC-LX82 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Select the class that you want to retrieve an

Internet radio station from.

Each time you press CLASS , the class switches to A to G in turn.

3 Use

/

to select the station number that you want to retrieve.

You can also select the station number by using the number buttons.

‘Preset Not Stored’ appears when you select an Internet radio station currently not being saved.

Setting up the network

In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this receiver is a broadband router (with the built-in DHCP server function), simply turn on the DHCP server function, and you will not need to set up the network manually. You must set up the network as described below only when you have connected this receiver to a server without the DHCP server function. Before you set up the network, consult with your ISP or the network manager for the required settings. It is advisory that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component.

IP Address

The IP address to be entered must be defined within the following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond the following ranges, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations.

Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254

Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254

Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254

Subnet Mask

In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP on paper. In most of the cases, enter

255.255.255.0.

Gateway IP

In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver, enter the corresponding IP address.

DNS Server Preferred/DNS Server Alternate

In case there is only one DNS server address provided by your ISP on paper, enter ‘DNS Server Preferred’ . In case there are more than two DNS server addresses, enter

‘DNS Server Alternate’ in the other DNS server address field.

Note

1 In case you make changes to the network configuration without the DHCP server function, make the corresponding changes to the network settings of this receiver.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 77 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port

This setting is required when you connect this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server. Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also, enter the port number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy

Port’ field.

Tip

• Press

/

or the numeric buttons to enter alphanumeric characters. To delete alphanumeric characters entered one at a time, press  or

CLEAR . ‘Cancel Key Editing Lose Changes?’ appears when you press RETURN or



while the cursor is placed in the leftmost position on the alphanumeric character entry screen. In this case, press ENTER to cancel the editing screen, RETURN to return to the editing screen.

SC-LX82:

THX MPX PQLS

VIDEO1

USB iPod

PHONO

VIDEO2

MULTI CH

HDMI

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

TV RECEIVER

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

STATUS

HOME

MENU

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

CH LEVEL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

THX MPX PQLS

SC-LX72:

VOL

CH VOL

MUTE

TV CD CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

INPUT

SELECT HDMI OUT

TOP MENU

BAND

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET PRESET

SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP

SBch A.ATT

DIMMER

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

D.ACCESS

/CLR

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

MASTER

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STEREO STANDARD

MENU

ADV SURR

1 SC-LX82 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to select ‘Home

Media Gallery’ as the input function.

It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network. The following screen appears when the Home

Media Gallery is selected as the input function.

Top Menu

A/V RECEIVER

Internet Radio

Neural Music Direct

******

Favorites

Recently Played

Setup

1/6

3 Select ‘SETUP’ and press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The SETUP screen appears.

Top Menu

A/V RECEIVER

Internet Radio

Neural Music Direct

******

Favorites

Recently Played

Setup

Top Menu

Information

Network Setup

Setup

A/V RECEIVER

6/6

Return

4 Select ‘Network Setup’ and press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The Network Setup screen appears.

5 Either ‘Network Found’ or ‘No Network Found’ appears. Check the network connection status and press ENTER.

• Network Found – Connected to a component on the network.

• No Network Found – Not connected to a component on the network.

The Network IP Settings screen appears.

6 Select ‘Static IP Address’ and press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The IP address screen appears. When you select

‘Automatic (DHCP)’ , the network is automatically set up, and you do not need to follow Steps 7 to 8. Proceed with

Step 9.

Top Menu

Network IP Settings

A/V RECEIVER

Automatic (DHCP)

Static IP Address

Return

7 Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The Edit IP address screen appears.

Top Menu

192.168.000.002

Change

IP address

A/V RECEIVER

2 / 2

Top Menu

Edit IP address

A/V RECEIVER

1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 0 0 0 . 0 0 2

Return Return

8 Enter the IP address.

Press

/

to select a number and

/

to move the cursor. After you select the last number, press



ENTER . You can also use the numeric buttons to enter a number. The Enable Proxy Server screen appears.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 78 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

9 Select ‘No’ or ‘Yes’ for the proxy server setting to deactivate or activate the proxy server.

In case you select ‘No’ , proceed with Step 14. In case you select ‘Yes’ , on the other hand, proceed with Step 10. The

Proxy Hostname screen appears.

Top Menu

Enable Proxy Server

A/V RECEIVER

Yes

Before proceeding with the following steps, check whether you have followed Steps from 1 to 3 on page 77.

1 Select ‘Information’ and press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The Firmware Version (for the Home Media Gallery of this receiver) screen appears.

Top Menu

X.X.XX.XXX

Firmware Version

A/V RECEIVER

Return

10 Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The Edit Proxy Hostname screen appears.

Top Menu

Proxy Hostname

A/V RECEIVER abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv

Change

Top Menu

Edit Proxy Hostname

A/V RECEIVER a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v

Return Return

11 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name.

After entry, press



or ENTER . The Proxy Port screen appears.

12 Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The Edit Proxy Port screen appears.

Top Menu

11111

Change

Proxy Port

A/V RECEIVER

Top Menu

Edit Proxy Port

A/V RECEIVER

1 1 1 1 1

Return

(The version of the illustration is not the latest.)

2 Check the network settings.

Press

/

to switch the display. Each time you press

/



, the display switches as follows.

Firmware Version



MAC Address



IP address



Subnet Mask



Gateway IP



Proxy Server

3 Press RETURN.

The Setup screen appears. To return to the Top Menu screen, press RETURN again.

Software update

Information on software updates may be posted on the

Pioneer website.

http://www.pioneer.eu

Return Return

13 Enter the port number of your proxy server.

Use the numeric buttons to enter the port number. After entry, press



or ENTER . The Settings OK?

screen appears.

14 Press ENTER to complete the network setup procedure.

The Top Menu screen appears.

15 Switch off the receiver.

Use  RECEIVER to switch off.

Checking the network settings

You can check the following network settings of this receiver: the MAC address, the IP address, the gateway

IP address, the proxy server, the Subnet mask, and the firmware version (for the Home Media Gallery of this receiver).

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 79 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Glossary aacPlus

AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding

Technologies. (www.codingtechnologies.com)

Ethernet

A frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). This player supports 100BASE-TX and 10BASE-T.

FLAC

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio format allows lossless codec. Audio is compressed in FLAC without any loss in quality. For more details about FLAC, visit the following website: http://flac.sourceforge.net/

Default Gateway

Default Gateway is a node on a computer network that serves as an access point to another network. A default gateway (such as a computer and router) is used to forward all traffic that is not addressed to a station within the local subnet.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Server

A DHCP server is a server that allocates IP addresses to hosts (network devices). In most cases, a broadband router serves as a DHCP server in a home network.

DLNA

The DLNA authorized logo makes it easy for consumers to recognize products that meet the new standard for home network PCs and other digital devices, as set down in the DLNA Guidelines for interoperability. This allows music, video, etc. to be enjoyed from various devices over a home network. This unit is compatible with music, photo and video content, and is based on the DLNA

Home Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines v1.0.

This unit can be used to playback music, photos and video stored on a DLNA-compatible server connected through a LAN cable.

Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is dedicated to the simplified sharing of digital content, such as digital music, photos and video among networked consumer electronics (CE) and PCs. By establishing a platform of interoperability based on open industry standards, DLNA delivers technical design guidelines that companies can use to develop digital home products that share content through wired or wireless networks in the home.

IP (Internet Protocol) address

A unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the

Internet Protocol standard, such as ‘192.168.0.1’. No duplicate numbers are allowed in the network.

LAN

LAN is an abbreviation for the Local Area Network, which is a computer network covering a small geographical area, like a home, office, or group of buildings. Current

LANs are most likely to be based on switched IEEE 802.3

Ethernet technology, running at 10, 100, or 1000 Mbit/s, or on IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi technology.

MAC (Media Access Control) address

An address attached to the port of any network device with an IP address. The MAC address is expressed as

“00:e0:36:xx:xx:xx” and cannot be changed.

Neural Surround

Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by FM Radio and Neural Music Direct for broadcasts of surround recordings and live events.

Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior localization of surround elements. System playback is scalable from stereo up to state-of-the-art multichannel surround.

Subnet mask

The IP address is divided into the network address part and the host address part. The subnet mask is expressed as ‘255.255.255.0’. In most cases, the subnet mask is automatically assigned by the DHCP server.

DNS

DNS is an abbreviation for the Domain Name System, which stores and associates many types of information with domain names. Most importantly, DNS translates domain names (computer hostnames or sitenames, such as www.pioneerelectronics.com) to IP addresses

(such as 202.221.192.106).

vTuner

vTuner is a paid online database service that allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet. vTuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different countries around the globe. For more detail about vTuner, visit the following website: http://www.radio-pioneer.com

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 80 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

“This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.”

Windows Media

Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media creation and distribution for Microsoft Windows.

Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Use an application licensed by Microsoft

Corporation to author, distribute, or play Windows Media formatted content. Using an application unauthorized by

Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction.

Windows Media DRM

Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights

Management) service for the Windows Media platform. It is designed to provide secure delivery of audio and/or video content over an IP network to a PC or other playback device in such a way that the distributor can control how that content is used. The WMDRM-protected content can only be played back on a component supporting the WMDRM service.

Windows Media Player 11/

Windows Media Connect

Windows Media Connect is software to deliver music, photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows XP computer to home stereo systems and TVs.

With this software, you can play back files stored on the

PC through various devices wherever you like in your home.

At this time you cannot download the Windows Media

Connect software from Microsoft’s website. If your server currently does not have Windows Media Connect installed, install Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows

XP) instead. This software can be downloaded from

Microsoft’s website.

For more information check the official Microsoft website.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 81 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

KURO LINK

Chapter 8:

KURO LINK

Important

Synchronized operation with a KURO LINK-compatible

Pioneer flat screen TV or Blu-ray disc player or with a component of another make that supports the KURO

LINK function is possible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.

For details about concrete operations, settings, etc., refer to the operating instructions for each component.

• You cannot use this function with components that do not support KURO LINK.

• We do not guarantee this receiver will work with

Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible components or components of other makes that support the KURO

LINK function. We do not guarantee that all synchronized operations will work with components of other makes that support the KURO LINK function.

• Use a High Speed HDMI™ cable when you want to use the KURO LINK function. The KURO LINK function may not work properly if a different type of

HDMI cable is used.

Making the KURO LINK connections

You can use synchronized operation for a connected flat screen TV and up to four other components.

Be sure to connect the flat screen TV’s audio cable to the audio input of this unit.

For details, see Connecting your TV and playback components on page 28.

Important

• When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.

After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.

• After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization, and you can turn this receiver on once it has stopped blinking.

• To get the most out of this function, we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a flat screen TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver.

• To use the KURO LINK function, connect this receiver and flat screen TV using the HDMI OUT 1 terminal. Connecting the KURO LINK compatible component using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal may result in malfunction. If this happens, turn off the

KURO LINK compatible component’s KURO LINK setting.

• While the receiver is equipped with four HDMI inputs, the KURO LINK function can only be used with up to three DVD or Blu-ray disc players or up to three DVD or Blu-ray disc recorders.

Cautions on the KURO LINK function

• Connect the TV directly to this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter

(such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

• Only connect components (Blu-ray disc player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

• When KURO LINK is set to ON , HDMI Input is automatically set to OFF .

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 82 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

KURO LINK

• If a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND ,

ALC , DIRECT , PURE DIRECT , OPTIMUM

SURROUND or STEREO is selected while the PQLS effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is disabled.

• When this receiver is connected by HDMI cable to a

Pioneer player that is compatible with the PQLS function via HDMI connection and HDMI reauthentication is performed (the HDMI indicator blinks), the PQLS effect is enabled and the listening mode is set to AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND , ALC , DIRECT , PURE

DIRECT , OPTIMUM SURROUND or STEREO is selected.

• When the receiver’s KURO LINK is turned ON , even if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is possible to output the audio and video signals from a player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the receiver, but only when a KURO LINKcompatible component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.) and compatible TV are connected. In this case, the receiver’s power turns on and the power and HDMI indicators light.

About connections with a product of a different brand that supports the KURO LINK function

The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver’s KURO LINK function is connected to a TV of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the KURO

LINK function. (Depending on the TV, however, some of the KURO LINK functions may not work.)

• You can set whether to output the sound over the speakers connected to the receiver or over the TV’s speakers using the TV’s menu screen.

• You can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the sound using the TV’s remote control.

• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV)

• The sound of TV programs or an external input connected to the TV can also be output from the speakers connected to the receiver. (This requires connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in addition to the HDMI cable.)

The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver’s KURO LINK function is connected to a player or recorder of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the KURO LINK function.

• When playback starts on the player or recorder, the receiver’s input switches to the HDMI input to which that component is connected.

See the Pioneer website for the latest information on the models of non-Pioneer brands and products that support the KURO LINK function.

KURO LINK Setup

You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as

KURO LINK-compatible connected components in order to make use of the KURO LINK function. For more information see the operating instructions for each component.

SC-LX82:

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD TV

VIDEO2 HDMI

DVR

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY VIDEO1

USB iPod

PHONO

MULTI CH

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

SOURCE

VOL

INPUT

TV CONTROL

MUTE

VOL

INPUT

TV CONTROL

MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

STATUS

HOME

MENU

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

CH LEVEL

SC-LX72:

MUTE

SOURCE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO CH

TOP MENU

BAND

T.EDIT

GUIDE DISP

DVD BD DVR HDMI

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

PRESET PRESET

TV CD CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY

REMOTE

SETUP PTY

SEARCH iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

INPUT

SELECT HDMI OUT

1 2 3

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.

3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.

4d.Other Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. KURO LINK Setup

2. Multi Ch In Setup

3. ZONE Audio Setup

4. Power ON Level Setup

5. Volume Limit Setup

6. Remote Control Mode Setup

7. Flicker Reduction Setup

4d1.KURO LINK Setup

A/V RECEIVER

KURO LINK

Display Power Off

: ON

: YES

Exit Return Exit Finish

4 Select the ‘KURO LINK’ setting you want.

Choose whether to set this unit’s KURO LINK function

ON or OFF . You will need to set it to ON to use the KURO

LINK function.

When using a component that does not support the

KURO LINK function, set this to OFF .

• ON – Enables the KURO LINK function.

• OFF – The KURO LINK is disabled. Synchronized operations cannot be used.

5 Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting you want.

If the TV’s power is turned off while using the KURO LINK function, the receiver’s power is also turned off (all power off function). This function can be disabled.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 83 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

KURO LINK

• YES – The all power off function is enabled. The receiver’s power turns off together with the TV’s power.

This function only works when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.

• NO – The all power off function is disabled. The receiver’s power is not affected when the TV’s power is turned off.

6 When you’re finished, press HOME MENU.

You will finish to HOME MENU .

• PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use the HDMI interface. This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-compatible players.

• PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.

Setting the PQLS function

PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio signal transfer control technology using the KURO LINK function. It offers higher-quality audio playback by controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is generated upon transmission.

• On players compatible with PQLS Multi Surround,

PQLS works for all sources. Set the player’s audio output to Linear PCM.

• On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio, PQLS only works when playing CDs.

Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information.

This function is activated when KURO LINK is set to ON .

SC-LX82:

SEARCH iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

RETURN

CH LEVEL

SOURCE

THX MPX

CH VOL

VOL

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

TVCONTROL

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

SC-LX72:

THX PHASE CTRL STATUS

TV/DTV MPX

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press PQLS to select PQLS setting.

The setting is displayed on the front panel display.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 84 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

KURO LINK

Before using synchronization

Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must:

1 Put all components into standby mode.

2 Turn the power on for all components, with the power for the flat screen TV being turned on last.

3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not.

4 Check whether the components connected to all

HDMI inputs are properly displayed.

Canceling synchronized amp mode

• When the synchronized amp mode is canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an

HDMI input or a TV program on the TV.

• When in the synchronized amp mode, the synchronized amp mode is canceled when the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the synchronized amp mode back on, select the synchronized amp mode using the TV’s remote control.

• When in the synchronized amp mode, the synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation that produces sound from the TV is performed from the TV’s menu screen, if the receiver’s HDMI output setting is changed, etc.

Synchronized amp mode

The synchronized amp mode can be set from the KURO

LINK-compatible TV’s remote control. See the explanation below for operations in the synchronized amp mode.

These functions are set from the TV’s menu screen. For more information, refer to the operating instructions of the KURO LINK-compatible TV.

Synchronized amp mode operations

When using the synchronized amp mode, the KURO

LINK-compatible component connected to the receiver operates in sync as described below.

• The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.

• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the

KURO LINK-compatible component is played.

• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the

TV’s channel is switched.

• The synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if the receiver’s input is switched to a component other than one connected by HDMI.

The operations below can also be used on Pioneer KURO

LINK-compatible flat screen TVs.

• When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the sound is muted, the volume status is displayed on the flat screen TV’s screen.

• When the OSD language is switched on the flat screen TV, the receiver’s language setting also switches accordingly.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 85 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Using other functions

Chapter 9:

Using other functions

Important

Setting the Audio options

There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO

PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, settings and status of the receiver.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press AUDIO PARAMETER.

2 Use

/

to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

3 Use

/

to set it as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Setting

MCACC

(MCACC preset)

What it does Option(s)

Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset memories are saved. When an MCACC preset memory has been renamed, the given name is displayed.

M1. MEMORY 1 to

M6. MEMORY 6

Default:

M1.

MEMORY 1

ON EQ

(Acoustic

Calibration

EQ)

Switches on/off the effects of EQ

Pro.

OFF a

S-WAVE

(Standing

Wave)

Switches on/off the effects of

Standing Wave Control.

OFF

Setting

DELAY

(Sound

Delay)

What it does

Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video.

MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volumes.

Option(s)

0.0 to 10.0

(frames)

1 second = 25 frames (PAL)

Default: 0.0

MIDNIGHT/

LOUDNESS

OFF

MIDNIGHT ON

LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble from music sources at low volumes.

LOUDNESS

BYPASS

TONE b

(Tone

Control)

Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses them completely.

BASS c

TREBLE

S.RTRV

(Sound c

Retriever)

Adjusts the amount of bass.

Adjusts the amount of treble.

With the Sound Retriever function, DSP processing is used to compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression, improving the sound’s sense of density and modulation.

–6 to +6 (dB)

Default: 0 (dB)

–6 to +6 (dB)

Default: 0 (dB)

OFF d

DNR

(Digital

Noise

Reduction)

DIALOG E.

(Dialog

Enhancem ent)

May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example, video tape with lots of background noise) when switched on.

Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack.

HIBITSMP

(High Bit/

High

Sampling)

(SC-LX72 only)

Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs or DVDs

(Smoother, more delicate musical expression can be achieved by requantizing 16 bit PCM or 20 bit compressed audio signals to 24 bits)

DUAL

(Dual

Mono)

OFF

Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played.

Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate channels.

CH1 – Channel

1 is heard only

CH2 – Channel

2 is heard only

CH1 CH2 –

Both channels heard from front speakers

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 86 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Using other functions

Setting

DRC

(Dynamic

Range

Control)

LFE

(LFE

Attenuate)

SACD

GAIN

HDMI f g

(HDMI

Audio)

What it does

Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS,

Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,

DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master

Audio (you may need to use this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes).

Option(s)

AUTO e

MAX

MID

OFF

0dB / –5dB/

–10dB/ –15dB/

–20dB

Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultralow bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers.

The LFE is not limited when set to

0 dB, which is the recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,

–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree.

When OFF is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.

OFF

Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range

(during digital processing).

0dB

+6 dB

AMPLIFIER Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver

( amp ) or through to a TV or flat screen TV. When THROUGH is selected, no sound is output from this receiver.

THROUGH

OFF

A.DELAY

(Auto delay)

C.WIDTH

(Center

Width)

(Applicable only when using a center speaker)

Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).

DIMENSION i

This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable.

The video delay time is automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time.

PANORAMA i

Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant

(minus settings), or more forward

(positive settings).

Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect.

0 to 7

Default:

–3 to +3

Default:

OFF

Setting What it does

C.IMAGE

(Center

Image)

(Applicable only when using a center speaker)

Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals. Adjust the effect from 0

(all center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10

(center channel sent to the center speaker only).

EFFECT Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced

Surround or ALC mode (each mode can be set separately).

Option(s)

0 to 10

Defaults:

Neo:6 MUSIC: 3

Neo:6

CINEMA: 10

10 to 90

Defaults: 50

( 90 for

EXT.STEREO

only) a.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light.

b.• Tone controls are disabled in THX listening modes.

• When you set the Tone Control function to ON , MIDNIGHT/

LOUDNESS is set to OFF . In the same way, when you set

MIDNIGHT/LOUDNESS to ON , the Tone Control function is set to

BYPASS .

c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON .

d.With the iPod/USB and HOME MEDIA GALLERY input function, by default S.RTRV

is set to ON .

e.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals.

Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.

f. You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB.

g.• HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.

• The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See Synchronized amp mode on page 84.

h.This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lipsync’) for

HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set

A.DELAY

to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.

i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.

j. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode.

About the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter)

(SC-LX82 only)

The SC-LX82 is designed for jitterless high sound quality thanks to the combination of the SRC and a high precision clock system.

The SRC function expands the dynamic range and frequency bandwidth for digital audio signals. (PCM 15bit or compressed 20-bit audio signals are converted to

24 bits, increasing the sampling frequency for data processing to achieve smoother, more delicate musical expression.)

There is no setting to turn the SRC function on or off; the

SRC function is activated in all modes other than Pure

Direct with an analog input and Multi channel analog input.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 87 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Using other functions

Setting the Video options

There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

• Note that if an option cannot be selected on the

VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the current source, setting and status of the receiver.

• These functions do not affect inputs other than DVD,

TV/SAT, DVR, VIDEO1, and VIDEO2.

Setting What it does

PCINEMA c,d,e

(PureCinema)

This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive.

Usually set to AUTO ; but try switching to OFF if the picture appears unnatural.

Additionally, certain PAL movie video (576i, 25 frames/second STB video output or DVD disc playback, etc.) that contain film progressive material cannot be recognized as such by this receiver. In such instances, if you choose PAL ,

PureCinema mode is activated.

Option(s)

AUTO

PAL

OFF

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press VIDEO PARAMETER.

P.MOTION

c,e

(Progressive

Motion)

Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive.

–4 to +4

Default: 0

2 Use

/

to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

YNR c Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y

(brightness) component.

0 to +8

Default: 0

3 Use

/

to set it as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

DETAIL c

SHARP c,f

(Sharpness)

Adjusts how sharp edges appear.

Adjusts the sharpness of the highfrequency (detailed) elements in the picture.

–4 to +4

Default: 0

–4 to +4

Default: 0

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Setting What it does

V.CONV

(Digital Video

Conversion)

Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR OUT jacks

(including HDMI OUT connector) for all video types (see page 27).

Option(s)

OFF

RES a

(Resolution)

AUTO

PURE

Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when analog video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, select this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to watch).

480p/576p

720p

1080i

1080p

BRIGHT

HUE c,g

Level) c

(Brightness)

CONTRAST

CHROMA

(Chroma c c

Adjusts the overall brightness.

Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.

Adjusts the red/green balance.

Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.

–6 to +6

Default: 0

–6 to +6

Default: 0

–6 to +6

Default: 0

–6 to +6

Default: 0

ASP b

(Aspect)

Specifies the aspect ratio when analog video input signals are output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while checking each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match your monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).

THROUGH

NORMAL a.• When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.

• When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor) connected by HDMI.

When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input (At this time, video signals are only output from the same type of terminals to which they were input).

• When a display is connected by HDMI, if this is set to something other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p signals are output from the component output terminals.

• Conversion to 1080p is only performed for 480i, 576i, 480p and

576p input signals.

b.• If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the monitor.

• This cannot be set when the resolution is set to PURE .

• NORMAL setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.

c.This setting is only displayed when 480i or 576i video signals are being input.

d.If the picture does not display properly when PAL is selected, select

AUTO or OFF .

Note

1 • All of the setting items can be set for each input function.

• Setting items other than V.CONV

can only be selected when V.CONV

is set to ON .

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 88 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Using other functions

En e.This setting is only valid for component outputs.

f. This setting is not valid for HDMI outputs.

g.This setting is not displayed for component inputs.

Switching the speaker system

If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker setting on page 121, three speaker system settings are possible using SPEAKERS . If you selected Normal , Front

Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 , the button will simply switch your main speaker system on or off. The options below are for the Speaker B setting only.

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls

The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-

ZONE remote controls on page 89.

INPUT

SELECTOR

PHASE

CONTROL

ADVANCED

MCACC PQLS HDMI

MASTER

VOLUME



STANDBY/ON

AUDIO PARAMETER

(TUNE)

VIDEO

(PRESET)

HOME MENU

ENTER

(TUNE)

(PRESET)

TUNER EDIT BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

HOME

THX

STANDARD

SURROUND

ADVANCED

SURROUND

STEREO iPod iPhone

RETURN

HDMI 4

VIDEO CAMERA

USB

CONTROL ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE SPEAKERS

MCACC

SETUP MIC PHONES

• Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a speaker system setting.

As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal , the button will simply switch your main speaker system (A) on or off.

Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:

• SP  A – Sound is output from speaker system A and the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.

• SP  B – Sound is output from the two speakers connected to speaker system B. Multichannel sources will not be heard. The same signal is output from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.

• SP  AB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.

The sound from speaker system B will be the same as the sound from speaker system A (multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).

• SP  (off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The same sound is output from the pre-out terminals

(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as when selecting speaker system A (above).

AUDIO PARAMETER

(TUNE)

VIDEO

(PRESET) ENTER

HOME MENU

(TUNE)

(PRESET)

TUNER EDIT BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

HOME

THX

STANDARD

SURROUND

ADVANCED

SURROUND

STEREO iPod iPhone

RETURN

HDMI 4

VIDEO CAMERA

USB

CONTROL ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE SPEAKERS

MCACC

SETUP MIC PHONES

Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:

•

The

Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel.

ZONE 2 ON zone

– Selects your primary (

ZONE 2&3 ON feature off

MULTI-ZONE

– Select both sub zones

• ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary ( ZONE 3 ) sub zone

MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE

indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.

ZONE 2 ) sub

2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the sub zone(s) you want.

If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 .

• When the receiver is on,

make sure that any operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this is not showing, the front panel controls affect the main zone only.

3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the zone you have selected.

For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected to the CD-R inputs to the primary ( ZONE 2 ) sub room.

• If you select TUNER , you can use the tuner controls to select a preset station (see Saving station presets on page 55 if you’re unsure how to do this).

Note

1 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 121. However, if SP  B is selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).

• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 121 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.

• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.

2 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.

3 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 89 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Using other functions

• When using ZONE 2 and ZONE 3, it is not possible to use the multi-zone function to play different inputs from among Home Media Gallery or iPod/USB. (It is possible to play when using the main zone and ZONE

2 or the main zone and ZONE 3.)

4 Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the zone you have selected.

This is only possible if you selected the Variable volume control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 126.

5 When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE

CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls.

You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone(s).

MULTI-ZONE remote controls

Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE

3 to operate the corresponding zone.

The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE remote controls:

Button



What it does

Switches on/off power in the sub zone.

INPUT SELECT Use to select the input function in the sub zone.

Input function buttons

Use to select the input function directly (this may not work for some functions) in the sub zone.

Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone.

MASTER

VOLUME +/–

(SC-LX72)

VOL +/–

(SC-LX82)

MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

Making an audio or a video recording

You can make an audio or a video recording from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).

Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the components you are recording to/from are hooked up in the same way (see Connecting your equipment on page 19 for more on connections).

Since the video converter is not available when making recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must connect your recorder using Component video if your source has also been connected using Component video.

For more information about video connections, see

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other video sources on page 32.

SC-LX82:

ZONE2 3

MULTI

OPERATION

THX MPX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

SOURCE

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

CH VOL

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

VOL

MUTE

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLASS

SC-LX72:

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY

VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

INPUT

SELECT

MCACC

A ATT

HDMI OUT

SLEEP

DIMMER

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

SBch

1 Select the source you want to record.

Use the input function buttons (or INPUT SELECT ).

• If necessary, set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal corresponding to the source component

(see Choosing the input signal on page 65 for more on this).

Note

1 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.

2 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.

• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.

3 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), Video parameters and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.

• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.

• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 90 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Using other functions

2 Prepare the source you want to record.

Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.

3 Prepare the recorder.

Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording device and set the recording levels.

Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set the audio recording level automatically—check the component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.

4 Start recording, then start playback of the source component.

Reducing the level of an analog signal

The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear distortion in the sound.

SC-LX82:

D C

PGM

S O

MENU

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

SOURCE

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT CH VOL

VOL

TVCONTROL

SC-LX72:

SELECT

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC

SBch

D.ACCESS

/CLR

HDMI OUT

SLEEP

DIMMER

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

INPUT

MASTER

VOLUME

D.ACCESS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

CLASS

ENTER

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

• Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press A.ATT to switch the input attenuator on or off.

Using the sleep timer

The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use the remote control to set the sleep timer.

SC-LX82:

THX MPX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

SOURCE

DIMMER AUDIO

CH VOL

VOL

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

TV CONTROL

SC-LX72:

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

INPUT

SELECT

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC

SBch

D.ACCESS

/CLR

A.ATT

HDMI OUT

DIMMER

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

MASTER

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

• Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.

30 min 60 min

Off 90 min

• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options again.

Dimming the display

You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the display automatically brightens for a few seconds.

SC-LX82:

THX MPX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

SOURCE

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

CH VOL

VOL

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

TVCONTROL

Note

1 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.

2 • You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.

• The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 91 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Using other functions

SC-LX72:

SELECT

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC

SBch

D.ACCESS

/CLR

A.ATT

HDMI OUT

SLEEP

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

INPUT

MASTER

VOLUME

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

• Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front panel display.

Switching the HDMI output

Set which terminal to use when outputting video and audio signals from the HDMI output terminals ( HDMI

OUT ALL , HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2 ).

The HDMI OUT1 terminal is compatible with the KURO

LINK function.

SC-LX82:

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

SOURCE

VOL CH

VOL

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

TV CONTROL

SC-LX72:

TV/DTV MPX PQLS iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

INPUT

SELECT

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC

SBch

A.ATT

SLEEP

DIMMER

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

• Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HDMI OUT.

Please wait a while when Please wait ...

is displayed.

The output switches among HDMI OUT ALL , HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 each time the button is pressed.

Checking your system settings

Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel processing and your current MCACC preset.

SC-LX82:

PRESET

SOURCE

PRESET ENTER

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

STATUS

HOME

MENU

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

RETURN

CH LEVEL

CH VOL

VOL

THX MPX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

TVCONTROL

SC-LX72:

PGM

HDD

THX

DVD

PHASE CTRL

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press STATUS to check the system settings.

These appear on the front panel display.

The front panel display shows each of the following settings for three seconds each:

Input Source

↓

Sampling Frequency

↓

Surround Back channel Processing

↓

MCACC preset

↓

ZONE 2 input

↓

ZONE 3 input

↓

KURO LINK

↓

HDMI OUT

2 When you’re finished, press STATUS again to switch off the display.

Note

1 • Synchronized amp mode on page 84 is canceled when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode, switch to HDMI OUT 1 , then select the synchronized amp mode on the flat screen TV using the flat screen TV’s remote control.

• When the power is turned off then back on after switching the HDMI output, the input is set to a setting between HDMI1 and HDMI4, or BD.

2 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF , even though they are on.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 92 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Using other functions

Resetting the system

Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.

Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF .

• Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from the receiver beforehand.

1 Switch the receiver into standby.

2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press  STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET  NO  .

3 Select ‘RESET’ using

/

, then press ENTER on the front panel.

The display shows RESET? OK .

4 Press ENTER to confirm.

OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver has been reset to the factory default settings.

• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the receiver is unplugged.

Default system settings

Setting

Digital Video Conversion

SPEAKERS

Surround Back System

Speaker System Front

Center

Surr

Default

Normal

SMALL

SMALLx2

YES

Crossover

X-Curve

THX Audio Setting

DIMMER

80 Hz

OFF

1.2 m<

Medium bright

Inputs

See Input function default and possible settings on page 48.

MULTI-ZONE

ZONE 2/3 Volume Level Variable

ZONE 2/3 Volume

HDMI

HDMI Audio

HDMI output

–60 dB

Amp

HDMI OUT ALL

ON KURO LINK

DSP

Surround back channel Processing

Phase Control

Full Band Phase Control

OFF

Setting

Sound Retriever

Sound Delay

Dual Mono

DRC

SACD Gain

LFE Attenuate

Auto delay

Up Mix

Digital Safety

Effect Level

2 PL II Music

Options

Neo:6 Options iPod/USB or HOME

MEDIA GALLERY function

Other functions

EXT.STEREO

Other modes

Center Width

Dimension

Panorama

Center Image

Default

OFF

0.0 frame

CH1

AUTO

0 dB

OFF

Neo:6 MUSIC: 3

Neo:6 CINEMA: 10

All Inputs Listening Mode

(2 ch)

Listening Mode

(x ch)

AUTO

SURROUND

AUTO

SURROUND

Listening Mode (HP) STEREO

See also Setting the Audio options on page 85 for other default

DSP settings.

MCACC

MCACC Position Memory M1: MEMORY 1

Channel Level (M1 to M6)

Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)

Standing Wave

(M1 to M6)

Standing Wave

On/Off

ATT of all channels/ filters

0.0 dB

3.00 m

0.0 dB

SWch Trim 0.0 dB

EQ Data (M1 to M6) All channels/bands 0.0 dB

EQ Trim 0.0 dB

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 93 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX82)

Chapter 10:

Controlling the rest of your system

(In case of SC-LX82)

Important

• This section includes explanations for the SC-LX82’s remote control. For instructions for the SC-LX72’s remote control, see Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX72) on page 100.

If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 94).

Operating multiple receivers

The remote control included with this receiver can be used to operate up to three other receivers (of the same model as this receiver) in addition to this receiver. The receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the preset code to set the remote control setting.

• Set the remote modes on the receivers before using this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 127).

1 Check that the remote control’s MULTI-ZONE selector switch is set to MAIN and that the operation selector switch is set to RECEIVER.

2 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME

MENU.

The remote LCD display shows SETUP .

3 Use

/

to select RC MODE, then press ENTER.

4 Use

/

to select the remote mode.

RC MODE 1 to 4 can be selected.

5 Press ENTER to set the remote mode.

The selected mode flashes for 3 seconds.

To operate another receiver, start over from step 1 to input its preset code.

Setting the remote to control other components

Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD ) using the component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote.

However, there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using.

Note

1 You can’t assign TUNER , HOME MEDIA GALLERY or iPod USB .

Note

• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing

MULTI OPERATION . To go back a step, press

RETURN .

• After one minute of inactivity, the remote automatically exits the operation.

Selecting preset codes directly

RECEIVER

ZONE2 3

SOURCE

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY

SOURCE

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

CH VOL PTY

SEARCH RETURN iPod

MULTI CH

TUNER

INPUT SELECT

VOL iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

MUTE

VIDEO

THX MPX PQLS

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME

MENU.

The remote LCD display shows SETUP .

2 Use

/

to select PRESET, then press ENTER.

3 Press the input function button for the component you want to control, then press ENTER.

When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL , set the remote control operation selector switch to TV here.

The LCD on the remote displays the component you want to control (for example DVD or TV ).

4 Use

/

to select the first letter of the brand name of your component, then press ENTER.

This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P for Pioneer).

5 Use

/

to select the manufacturer’s name from the list, then press ENTER.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 94 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX82)

6 Use

/

to select the proper code from the list, then try using this remote with your component.

The code should start with the component type (for example, DVD 020 ). If there is more than one, start with the first one.

To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing  SOURCE . If it doesn’t seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).

• If you can’t find or properly enter a preset code, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Controls for the components on page 98).

7 If your component is controlled successfully, press

ENTER to confirm.

The remote LCD display shows OK .

Programming signals from other remote controls

If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you can program signals from the remote control of another component. This can also be used to program additional operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after assigning a preset code.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME

MENU.

The remote LCD display shows SETUP .

2 Use

/

to select LEARNING, then press ENTER.

The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component you want to control (for example DVD or TV ).

3 Press the input function button for the component you want to control, then press ENTER.

PRES KEY blinks in the LCD display.

4 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control.

PRES KEY lights to indicate the remote is ready to accept a signal.

• The remote controls should be 3 cm apart.

3 cm

MULTI OPERATION

5 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this receiver’s remote control.

For example, if you want to learn the playback control signal, press and hold  briefly. The LCD display will show OK if the operation has been learned.

If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the

LCD will display ERROR briefly, and then display PRES

KEY again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching) button as you vary the distance between the two remotes, until the LCD display shows OK .

Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls. The buttons available are shown below:

RECEIVER

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD TV DVR

VIDEO2 HDMI

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY VIDEO1

USB iPod

PHONO

MULTI CH

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET ENTER

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

RETURN

CH LEVEL

THX MPX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLR

CLASS

ENTER

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

MUTE

VIDEO

Note

1 • When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please select PIONEER DVR 450 , 451 or 452 .

• When using a Pioneer flat screen TV released prior to summer 2005, please select preset code 644 .

2 The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).

3 • You can’t assign TUNER , HOME MEDIA GALLERY or iPod USB .

• The TV CONTROL buttons ( TV  , TV VOL +/– , TV CH +/– , MUTE and INPUT ) can only be learned after the operation selection switch is set to TV .

4 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.

5 • Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.

• If the remote LCD shows FULL , it means the memory is full. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 95 to erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 95 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX82)

6 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 4 and 5.

To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 1 through 5.

7 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation(s).

Erasing one of the remote control button settings

This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME

MENU.

The remote LCD display shows SETUP .

2 Use

/

to select ERASE, then press ENTER.

The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component corresponding to the button setting to be erased.

3 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased, then press ENTER.

The LCD display flashes PRES KEY .

4 Press and hold the button to be erased for two seconds.

The LCD display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the button has been erased.

5 Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.

6 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds when you’re done.

Resetting the remote control presets

This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and programmed buttons.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME

MENU.

The remote LCD display shows SETUP .

2 Use

/

to select RESET, then press ENTER.

RESET flashes in the LCD display.

3 Press and hold ENTER for about two seconds.

The LCD shows OK to confirm the remote presets have been erased.

Confirming preset codes

Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned to an input function button.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME

MENU.

The remote LCD display shows SETUP .

2 Use

/

to select READ ID, then press ENTER.

The LCD on the remote prompts you for the input function button you want to check.

3 Press the button of the component for which you want to check the preset code, then press ENTER.

The brand name and preset code appears in the display for three seconds.

Renaming input function names

You can customize the names that appear on the remote

LCD when you select an input function (for example, you could change the name of DVR to HDD/DVR ).

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME

MENU.

The remote LCD display shows SETUP .

2 Use

/

to select RENAME, then press ENTER.

The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the input function you want to rename.

3 Press the input function button you want to rename then press ENTER.

4 Use

/

to select NAME EDT, then press ENTER.

To reset the button to its original (default) name, select

NAME RST above.

5 Edit the name of the input function in the remote control LCD, pressing ENTER when you’re finished.

Use

/

to change the character and

/

to move forward/back a position. The name can be up to eight characters (the possible characters are listed below).

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

0123456789 \ / * + – [space]

Note

1 When Selecting preset codes directly on page 93 are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 96 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX82)

Direct function

• Default setting: ON

You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same time, using your receiver to playback a different component. This could let you, for example, use the remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player.

When direct function is on, any component you select

(using the input function buttons) will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct function off, you can operate the remote control without affecting the receiver.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME

MENU.

The remote LCD display shows SETUP .

2 Use

/

to select DIRECT F, then press ENTER.

The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the input function you want to control.

3 Press the input function button for the component you want to control, then press ENTER.

4 Use

/

to switch direct function ON or OFF, then press ENTER.

The LCD shows OK to confirm the setting.

Multi Operation and System Off

The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 5 commands for the components in your system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using only two buttons on the remote control.

Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use one button to stop and switch off a series of components in your system at the same time.

Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown sequence

Set the remote control operation mode selector switch to

RECEIVER when you want to program this receiver’s operations, to SOURCE when you want to program operations of other components.

RECEIVER

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

SOURCE

TOP MENU

BAND

T.EDIT

GUIDE

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY

PRESET PRESET

CH VOL

PTY

SEARCH

RETURN

VOL iPod

MULTI CH

TUNER

INPUT SELECT iPod CTRL

STATUS

HOME

MENU

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE MUTE

THX MPX PQLS

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME

MENU.

The remote LCD display shows SETUP .

2 Use

/

to select MULTI OP or SYS OFF from the menu and press ENTER.

If you selected Multi Operation ( MULTI OP ), the LCD on the remote prompts you for an input function button.

If you selected System Off ( SYS OFF ), go to step 4.

3 Press the input function button for the component that will start the multi-operation, then press ENTER.

For example, if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player, press DVD .

4 Use

/

to select CODE EDT, then press ENTER.

To erase any previously stored multi-operations (or shutdown sequences) select CODE ERS above.

5 Use

/

to select a command in the sequence, then press ENTER.

If this is the first command in the sequence, select 1ST

CODE . Otherwise, simply choose the next command in the sequence. PRES KEY flashes after you press ENTER .

6 If necessary, press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input.

This is only necessary if the command is for a new component (input function).

7 Select the button for the command you want to input.

The following remote control commands can be selected:

Note

1 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see

Operating multiple receivers on page 93 for more on this).

• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.

• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 97 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX82)

RECEIVER

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD TV DVR

VIDEO2 HDMI

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY VIDEO1

USB iPod

PHONO

MULTI CH

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET ENTER

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

HOME

MENU

STATUS

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

RETURN

CH LEVEL

THX MPX PQLS

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGM

STEREO

MENU

STANDARD ADV SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

A.ATT

SBch MCACC INFO

DISP

HDMI OUT

CH VOL

VOL

D.ACCESS

CLASS

ENTER

CLR

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE MUTE

AUDIO VIDEO

• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on or off. This is done automatically.

With Pioneer components , you don’t need to:

• program the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence (except DVD recorders);

These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).

8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 to program a sequence of up to five commands.

9 When you’re finished, use

/

to select EXIT from the menu and press ENTER.

You will return to the remote control Setup menu. Select

* EXIT * again to exit.

Using multi operations

You can start multi operations with the receiver switched on, or in standby.

RECEIVER

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD TV DVR

VIDEO2 HDMI

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY VIDEO1

USB iPod CD

MULTI CH

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

MULTI OP flashes in the display.

2 Press an input function button that has been set up with a multi operation.

The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically.

Using System off

RECEIVER

MAIN

ZONE2 3

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD TV DVR

VIDEO2 HDMI

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY VIDEO1

USB iPod CD

MULTI CH

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

MULTI OP flashes in the display.

2 Press  SOURCE.

The command sequence you programmed will run, then all Pioneer components will switch off

, followed by this receiver.

Note

1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 98 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX82)

PGM ( Red)

MENU (Green)

(Yellow)















(Blue)

AUDIO

DISP

CH +/–

Controls for the components

This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the commands

(see Operating multiple receivers on page 93 for more on this). Set the remote control operation selector switch to

SOURCE , then press the other device operation button of the device you want to operate.

• TV CONTROL on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV operation selector switch.

Button(s)

 SOURCE POWER ON/OFF

Number buttons numerics

• (dot) • (dot)

POWER ON/OFF numerics

KURO LINK

POWER ON/OFF numerics

CLEAR

POWER ON/OFF numerics

–

POWER ON/OFF numerics



ENTER

(CLASS)

–

TV TV (Monitor)

CH ENTER

BD/DVD

ENTER

HDD/DVR

CLEAR –

VCR SAT/CATV

ENTER

EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU – LIST

TOOLS/GUIDE USER MENU

TOOLS a

TOP MENU/

DISC NAVI

GUIDE – GUIDE









ENTER









ENTER

HOME MENU









ENTER

HOME MENU









ENTER

HOME MENU









ENTER

HOME MENU

–









ENTER

HOME

 +  a.Controls for BD.

RETURN

Red

Green

Yellow

Blue

–

TV/DTV

–

AUDIO

DISPLAY

CH+/-

–

RETURN

Red

Green

Yellow

Blue

–

AUTO SETUP

FREEZE

–

AV SELECTION

SCREEN SIZE

AUDIO

DISPLAY

CH+/-

–

RETURN

–















AUDIO

DISPLAY

OUTPUT

RESOLUTION

+/– a

–

RETURN

HDD/DVD

VCR

TV/DTV















AUDIO

DISPLAY

CH+/-

–















AUDIO

–

CH+/-

–

RETURN

Red

Green

Yellow

Blue



C/ 

D/ 

A/ 



B/ 

E/ 

AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

CH+/-

RECORD

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 99 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX82)

Button(s)

 SOURCE POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF

Number buttons numerics

+10

LD CD/CD-R/SACD numerics

>10/CLEAR

MD/DAT numerics

CLEAR a

–

TAPE

CLEAR • (dot)

ENTER

(CLASS)

ENTER DISC/ENTER – ENTER

TOP MENU – – –

– – –







ENTER

 







ENTER

–

RETURN

PGM ( Red)

(Yellow)













(Blue)



AUDIO

DISP a.Controls for MD.

b.Controls for SACD.

c.Controls for DAT.

–















AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

LEGATO LINK b

–

SACD SETUP b

–

PROGRAM

REPEAT

SHUFFLE















PURE AUDIO a

TIME a

–











 /MS– c

 /MS+ c

–

 /  /  / 



–













 













AUDIO

DISP

CH +/–

Button(s)

 SOURCE

TV (Projector)

POWER ON

MOVIE

STANDARD

DYNAMIC

USER1

USER2

USER3

COLOR+

SHARP+

GAMMA

COLOR-

• (dot) SHARP-

ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP

EXIT







ENTER



INFO









ENTER

TEST

HIDE

HDMI1

HDMI2

COMP.

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

BRIGHT-

BRIGHT+

POWER OFF

ASPECT

CONTRAST+/-

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 100 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX72)

Controlling the rest of your system

(In case of SC-LX72)

Important

• This section includes explanations for the SC-LX72’s remote control. For instructions for the SC-LX82’s remote control, see Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX82) on page 93.

Operating multiple receivers

• Set the remote modes on the receivers before using this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 127).

SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP

SBch

INPUT

SELECT HDMI OUT

A.ATT

DIMMER

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL RECEIVER

REMOTE

SETUP

D.ACCESS

/CLR

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

INPUT

MASTER

VOLUME

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

1 Check the operation selector switch to MAIN.

2 Press .

3 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after the LED flashes twice.

4 Use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit preset code (see below).

• Receiver 1: 6 1 9 3 5 (Default)

• Receiver 2: 6 2 6 3 0

• Receiver 3: 6 2 6 3 1

• Receiver 4: 6 2 6 3 2

The LED flashes twice when the preset code has been properly registered. When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes once to indicate that the setting has failed.

To operate another receiver, start over from step 1 to input its preset code.

Setting the remote to control other components

Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD ) using the component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote.

Note

• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing

RECEIVER . To go back a step, press RETURN .

• After ten seconds of inactivity, the remote automatically exits the operation.

Selecting preset codes directly

1 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL , press TV

CTRL here.

2 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after the LED flashes twice.

3 Use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit preset code.

See Preset code list on the separate booklet.

The LED flashes twice when the preset code has been properly registered. When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes once to indicate that the setting has failed.

100

Note

1 You can’t assign RECEIVER , TUNER , HOME MEDIA GALLERY or iPod USB .

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 101 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX72)

4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other components you want to control.

To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing  SOURCE . If it doesn’t seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).

Programming signals from other remote controls

1 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after the LED flashes twice.

2 Use the number buttons to enter 9, 7, 5.

The LED flashes twice.

3 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

4 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control.

The LED flashes continuously for about 5 seconds.

• The remote controls should be 3 cm apart.

3 cm

INPUT SELECT

MASTER VOLUME

Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls. The buttons available are shown below:

AUDIO

PARAMETER

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TUNE

RECEIVER

TOP MENU

BAND

T.EDIT

GUIDE

DVD BD DVR HDMI

PRESET PRESET

TV CD CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI OUT

SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STEREO STANDARD

MENU

ADV SURR

PGM

THX PHASE CTRL

SBch A.ATT

DIMMER

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

D.ACCESS

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

INPUT

MASTER

VOLUME

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL RECEIVER

TV CONTROL

REMOTE

SETUP

CH VOL

MUTE

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

AUDIO VIDEO

6 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 4 and 5.

To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 1 through 5.

5 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this receiver’s remote control.

For example, if you want to learn the playback control signal, press and hold  briefly. If the LED flashes twice then turns off, this indicates that learning has been successful. If the LED only flashes once, learning has failed.

Erasing the remote control button settings

This erases the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.

1 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after the LED flashes twice.

2 Use the number buttons to enter 9, 7, 6.

The LED flashes twice.

3 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased, then press the button to be erased twice.

To erase all the settings stored at the input function buttons, press the input function button twice here.

The LED flashes twice to confirm the button has been erased.

4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.

Note

1 The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).

2 • You can’t assign TUNER , HOME MEDIA GALLERY or iPod USB .

• The TV CONTROL buttons ( TV  , TV VOL +/– , TV CH +/– and INPUT ) can only be learned after the TV CTRL is pressed.

3 The learning mode is cancelled if no remote control signal is received within 5 seconds.

4 • Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.

• Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.

• If the LED flashes once, it means the memory is full. See Erasing the remote control button settings above to erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).

101

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 102 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX72)

Multi Operation and System Off

The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 32 commands for the components in your system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using only two buttons on the remote control.

Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use one button to stop and switch off a series of components in your system at the same time. The System Off feature allows you to program a series of 5 commands for the components in your system.

Programming a multi-operation

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

INPUT

SELECT HDMI OUT

RECEIVER SOURCE

DVD BD DVR HDMI

SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

SBch A.ATT

DIMMER

TV CD CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY

REMOTE

SETUP iPod USB TUNER VIDEO1 VIDEO2

D.ACCESS

/CLR

CH LEVEL

INPUT

CLASS

ENTER

MASTER

VOLUME

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

INPUT

1 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after the LED flashes twice.

2 Use the number buttons to enter 9, 9, 5.

The LED flashes twice.

If you selected System Off, go to step 3.

If you selected Multi Operation, go to step 4.

3 Press the  SOURCE button.

4 Press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input, then press the button for the command you want to input.

For example, if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player, press DVD , then press 

SOURCE .

The following remote control commands can be selected:

AUDIO

PARAMETER

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TUNE RECEIVER

T.EDIT

BAND

DVD BD DVR HDMI

PRESET PRESET

TV CD CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

INPUT

SELECT HDMI OUT

SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STEREO STANDARD

MENU

ADV SURR

PGM

THX PHASE CTRL

SBch A.ATT

DIMMER

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

D.ACCESS

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

INPUT

MASTER

VOLUME

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL RECEIVER

TV CONTROL

REMOTE

SETUP

CH VOL

MUTE

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

VIDEO AUDIO

• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on or off. This is done automatically.

With Pioneer components , you don’t need to:

• program the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence (except DVD recorders);

These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).

5 Repeat step 4 to program a sequence.

• A space of 250 ms can be input between commands by pressing REMOTE SETUP between commands.

• If the LED does not light when the input function button is pressed, this indicates that there is no command for that input function.

Using multi operations

You can start multi operations with the receiver switched on, or in standby.

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

DVD

DVR HDMI

CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO1 VIDEO2

INPUT

SELECT HDMI OUT

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

1 Press MULTI OPE.

2 Press an input function button that has been set up with a multi operation.

The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically.

102

Note

1 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see

Operating multiple receivers on page 100 for more on this).

• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.

• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 103 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX72)

Using System off

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

RECEIVER SOURCE

DVD

DVR HDMI

CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO1 VIDEO2

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

1 Press MULTI OPE.

2 Press  SOURCE.

The command sequence you programmed will run, then all Pioneer components will switch off

, followed by this receiver.

Controls the components

This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 100 for more on this).

Use the input function buttons to select the component.

• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the

TV CTRL button.

RECEIVER

Resetting the remote control presets

This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and programmed buttons.

1 Check the operation selector switch to MAIN.

2 Press .

3 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after the LED flashes twice.

4 Use the number buttons to enter 9, 8, 1.

The LED flashes four times to indicate that the resetting is completed.

Default preset codes

Input function button Preset code

DVD 3 1 5 7 1

DVR

HDMI

CD-R

VIDEO1

VIDEO2

TV CTRL

3 2 4 4 2

2 2 3 0 6

3 2 4 4 2

1 3 0 0 0

7 0 4 6 8

7 1 0 8 7

2 0 0 5 8

1 3 0 0 0

RECEIVER

6 1 9 3 5

DVD

DVR HDMI

CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

INPUT

SELECT HDMI OUT

SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP

SBch A.ATT

DIMMER

D.ACCESS

CH LEVEL CLASS

ENTER

INPUT

MASTER

VOLUME

TV CONTROL

CH VOL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TUNE

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT STEREO STANDARD

MENU

ADV SURR

PGM

THX PHASE CTRL

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL RECEIVER

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

RECEIVER

Note

1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.

2 When Selecting preset codes directly on page 100 are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.

103

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 104 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX72)

HDD ( Red)

DVD (Green)

(Yellow)















(Blue)

AUDIO

DISP

CH +/–

Button(s)

 SOURCE

TV TV (Monitor) numerics

BD/DVD numerics

HDD/DVR numerics

VCR numerics

SAT/CATV

POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF

Number buttons numerics

• (dot)

ENTER

(CLASS)

• (dot)

CH ENTER

KURO LINK

CH ENTER

CLEAR

ENTER

CLEAR

– numerics



ENTER

EXIT EXIT TOP MENU – LIST

EPG/TOOLS USER MENU

TOOLS a

TOP MENU/

DISC NAVI

GUIDE – GUIDE









ENTER









ENTER

HOME MENU









ENTER

HOME MENU









ENTER

HOME MENU









ENTER

HOME MENU

–









ENTER

HOME

 +  a.Controls for BD.

RETURN

Red

Green

Yellow

Blue

–

TV/DTV

–

AUDIO

DISPLAY

P+/–

–

RETURN

Red

Green

Yellow

Blue

–

AUTO SETUP

FREEZE

–

AV SELECTION

SCREEN SIZE

AUDIO

DISPLAY

CH+/–

–

RETURN

–















AUDIO

DISPLAY

OUTPUT

RESOLUTION

+/– a

–

RETURN

HDD

DVD

VCR















AUDIO

DISPLAY

CH+/–

–















AUDIO

–

CH+/–

–

RETURN

A/ Red

B/ Green

C/ Yellow

MENU/ Blue

E/ 





D/ 







AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

CH+/–

RECORD

104

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 105 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX72)

Button(s)

 SOURCE

LD CD/CD-R/SACD numerics

MD/DAT

–

TAPE

POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF

Number buttons numerics

• (dot)

ENTER

(CLASS)

+10

ENTER

>10/CLEAR

DISC/ENTER numerics

CLEAR b

OPEN/CLOSE b

CLEAR

ENTER

TOP MENU – – MS



–

LEGATO LINK a – MS











ENTER









ENTER

–

SACD SETUP a

–



–



 /  / 

HDD ( Red)

(Yellow)















(Blue)

AUDIO

DISP a. Controls for SACD.

b. Controls for MD.

RETURN

–















AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

–

PROGRAM

REPEAT

SHUFFLE















PURE AUDIO a

TIME a

–















–















–















AUDIO

DISP

CH +/–

Button(s)

 SOURCE

TV (Projector)

POWER ON

MOVIE

STANDARD

DYNAMIC

USER1

USER2

USER3

COLOR+

SHARP+

GAMMA

COLOR-

• (dot) SHARP-

ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP

EXIT







ENTER



INFO









ENTER

TEST

HIDE

HDMI1

HDMI2

COMP.

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

BRIGHT-

BRIGHT+

POWER OFF

ASPECT

CONTRAST+/-

105

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 106 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

106

Chapter 11:

The Advanced MCACC menu

Important

Making receiver settings from the

Advanced MCACC menu

The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic

Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic characteristics of the listening environment are measured and the frequency response is calibrated accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it closer to a studio environment than ever before.

Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing wave control function using a unique process to perform acoustic analysis and reduce their influence.

This section describes how to calibrate the sound field automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data manually.

SC-LX82:

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD TV DVR

HDMI

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY VIDEO1

USB iPod

VIDEO2

PHONO

MULTI CH

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

SOURCE

TV CONTROL

VOL

INPUT

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

MUTE

TUNE

MUTE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

STATUS

HOME

MENU

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

CH LEVEL

SC-LX72:

SOURCE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

T.EDIT

GUIDE

DVD BD DVR HDMI

PRESET

TV CD

INPUT

CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

PRESET

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.

Use  RECEIVER to switch on.

• If headphones are connected to the receiver, disconnect them.

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your

TV. Use

///

and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu.

• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME

MENU .

• The screen saver will automatically appear after five minutes of inactivity.

3 Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the HOME MENU, then press ENTER.

HOME MENU

A/V RECEIVER

1. Advanced MCACC

2. MCACC Data Check

3. Data Management

4. System Setup

Exit Return

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

1.Advanced MCACC

A/V RECEIVER a. Full Auto MCACC b. Auto MCACC c. Manual MCACC d. Demo

Exit Return

• Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase

Control) on page 45 for a quick and effective automatic surround setup.

Note

1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the HOME MENU .

2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when the HOME MEDIA GALLERY or iPod/USB input function is selected (in either the main or sub zone).

When you set ZONE 2 , ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 88), you can’t use the HOME MENU .

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 107 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

• Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 107 for a more detailed MCACC setup. In addition, the Full Band Phase Control function calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the connected speakers.

• Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see

Manual MCACC setup on page 109).

• Demo – No settings are saved and no errors occur.

When the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound

(Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45, you can customize your setup options below. You can calibrate your system differently for up to six different

MCACC presets

, which are useful if you have different listening positions depending on the type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC menu, then press ENTER.

If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to

Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 106.

1.Advanced MCACC

A/V RECEIVER a. Full Auto MCACC b. Auto MCACC c. Manual MCACC d. Demo

ALL

1b.Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2

FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3

THX Speaker : NO

Speaker Setting

Channel Level

Speaker Distance

EQ Pro & S-Wave

Full Band Phase Ctrl

START

Exit Return Exit

2 Select the parameters you want to set.

Use

/

to select the item, then use

/

to set.

Return

ALL

1b.Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2

FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3

THX Speaker : NO

Speaker Setting

Channel Level

Speaker Distance

EQ Pro & S-Wave

Full Band Phase Ctrl

START

ALL

1b.Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2

FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3

THX Speaker : NO

Speaker Setting

Channel Level

Speaker Distance

EQ Pro & S-Wave

Full Band Phase Ctrl

START

Important

• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.

• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.

CAUTION

• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.

THX

Exit Return Exit Return

• Auto MCACC – The default is ALL (recommended), but you can limit the system calibration to only one setting (to save time) if you want.

4 options are ALL , Keep SP System ,

The available

Speaker

Setting , Channel Level , Speaker Distance , EQ Pro

& S-Wave and Full Band Phase Ctrl .

• EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC

Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave ) – This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted.

After a single calibration is performed, each of the following three correction curves can be stored separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default) implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN

sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings

(no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels).

Note

1 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1 to MEMORY6 until you rename them in Data Management on page 118.

2 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.

3 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the Auto MCACC menu (step 2).

4 • The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when Keep SP System or EQ Pro & S-Wave is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional on page 112 for more on this.

• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see Setting the Audio options on page 85.

5 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 121) unchanged.

6 If you selected ALL as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJ and FRONT

ALIGN settings.

107

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 108 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

108

• THX Speaker (only available when the Auto MCACC

Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting ) – Select YES if you are using THX speakers (set all speakers to

SMALL ), otherwise leave it set to NO .

• STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available when the

Auto MCACC Menu (page 107) is EQ Pro & S-Wave )

– In addition to measurements at the listening position, you can use two more reference points for which test tones will be analyzed for standing waves.

This is useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several seating positions in your listening area.

Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on-screen and note the last microphone placement will be at your main listening position:

2nd reference point

3rd reference point

Main listening position

3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

AUDIO PARAMETER

(TUNE)

(PRESET)

HOME MENU

ENTER

(TUNE)

VIDEO

(PRESET)

TUNER EDIT BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT

HOME

THX

STANDARD

SURROUND

ADVANCED

SURROUND

STEREO iPod iPhone

RETURN

HDMI 4

VIDEO CAMERA

USB

CONTROL ON/OFF

MULTI-ZONE SPEAKERS

MCACC

SETUP MIC PHONES

If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.

4 When you’re finished settings the options, select

START then press ENTER.

5 Follow the instructions on-screen.

• Make sure the microphone is connected.

• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically detected every time you switch on the system. Make sure it is on and the volume is turned up.

• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 47 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference.

6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.

• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.

• With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise!

or Check microphone ) select RETRY after checking for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 47) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.

7 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.

1b.Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

Now Analyzing... 2/10

Environment Check

Ambient Noise : OK

Microphone :

Speaker YES/NO :

1b.Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

L : YES

C : YES

R : YES

SR : YES

SBR : YES

SBL : YES

SL : YES

SW : YES

OK RETRY

Exit Cancel Exit Cancel

• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection.

If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use

/

to select the speaker and

/

to change the setting and continue.

• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring

(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.

– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.

Note

1 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.

2 It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.

3 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting from the Auto MCACC menu.

4 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 109 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again.

– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and continue.

8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.

1b.Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

Now Analyzing...

1b.Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

Now Analyzing... 5/10

Subwoofer Check :

Surround Analysis

Speaker System : OK

Channel Level :

Speaker Distance :

Standing Wave :

Reverb :

Aco Cal EQ Pro :

Exit Cancel Exit Cancel

Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.

• If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point setup

(in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the

2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position.

9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically.

The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the

Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or Manual

SP Setup menu (starting on page 121).

You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check screen:

• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers you’ve connected (see page 121 for more on this)

• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker system (see page 110 or 122 for more on this)

• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers from the listening position (see page 111 or 123 for more on this)

• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower

‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 111 for more on this)

• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency balance of your speaker system based on the acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 112 for more on this)

• Group Delay – The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics can be displayed graphically (see

Group Delay on page 117 for more on this).

• Output PC – The data transfer mode with the connected computer is set. The graphs of the reverb characteristics and group delay characteristics before and after calibration and the various MCACC parameters can be checked (see Output PC on page 117 for more on this).

Press RETURN after you have finished checking each screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back to the HOME MENU .

Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.

Manual MCACC setup

You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more familiar with the system. Before making these settings, you should have already completed Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase

Control) on page 45.

You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).

CAUTION

• The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are output at high volume.

Important

• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing

HOME MENU (step 2 in Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 106).

• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position.

Press HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If the microphone is connected while the HOME

MENU is not being displayed, the display will change to the Full Auto MCACC under Advanced MCACC .

Note

1 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 121.

• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.

2 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal surround sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.

109

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 110 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

110

• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 47 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference.

• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up the volume to the middle position.

1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the Advanced

MCACC menu.

See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 106 if you’re not already at this screen.

1.Advanced MCACC

A/V RECEIVER a. Full Auto MCACC b. Auto MCACC c. Manual MCACC d. Demo

1c.Manual MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

1. Fine Channel Level

2. Fine SP Distance

3. Standing Wave

4. EQ Adjust

5. EQ Professional

6. Precision Distance

Fine Channel Level

• Default setting: 0.0dB

(all channels)

You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the

Manual speaker setup on page 121.

1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual

MCACC setup menu.

The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.

1c.Manual MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

1. Fine Channel Level

2. Fine SP Distance

3. Standing Wave

4. EQ Adjust

5. EQ Professional

6. Precision Distance

1c1.Fine Channel Level

A/V RECEIVER

CAUTION

Loud test tones will be output.

Please wait...**

Exit Return Exit Return

Precision Distance is only for

SC-LX82.

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to make these settings in order.

• Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine

Channel Level below).

• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on page 111).

• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low frequencies in your listening room (see Standing

Wave on page 111).

The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 112:

• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance of your speaker system while listening to test tones

(see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 112).

• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers and make detailed settings according to your room’s reverb characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional on page 112).

• Precision Distance – Fine-adjusting the positions of the speakers (see Precision Distance (SC-LX82 only) on page 114).

Exit Return

Precision Distance is only for

SC-LX82.

Exit Cancel

2 Adjust the level of the left channel.

This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want to keep the level around 0.0dB

so that you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the other speaker levels.

1c1.Fine Channel Level

A/V RECEIVER

MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1

Reference Ch : L

Ref.Ch Level : 0.0 dB

Exit Cancel

• After pressing ENTER , test tones will be output.

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/

–10.0 dB) as necessary.

Use

/

to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds like both tones are the same volume, press



to confirm and continue to the next channel.

1c1.Fine Channel Level

A/V RECEIVER

Exit Finish

• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use

/

to select it.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 111 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

Fine Speaker Distance

• Default setting: 3.00 m (all speakers)

For proper sound depth and separation with your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 cm increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 121.

1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

1c.Manual MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

1. Fine Channel Level

2. Fine SP Distance

3. Standing Wave

4. EQ Adjust

5. EQ Professional

6. Precision Distance

1c2.Fine SP Distance

A/V RECEIVER

MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1

Reference Ch : L

Ref.Ch Distance : 3.61m

Exit Return

Precision Distance is only for

SC-LX82.

Exit Cancel

2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position.

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary.

Use

/

to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in terms of speaker distance from 0.01m

to 9.00m

1c2.Fine SP Distance

A/V RECEIVER

SBL : 5.13m

SBR : 5.77m

SW : 3.54m

Exit Finish

Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel. From the listening position, face the two speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span.

When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up, press



to confirm and continue to the next channel.

• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use

/

to select it.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Standing Wave

• Default setting: ON

/ ATT 0.0dB

(all filters)

Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain conditions, sound waves from your speaker system resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area. This can have a negative effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room, it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The

Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During playback of a source, you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

1c.Manual MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

1. Fine Channel Level

2. Fine SP Distance

3. Standing Wave

4. EQ Adjust

5. EQ Professional

6. Precision Distance

Filter

Channel

MCACC

M1.MEMORY1

1c3.Standing Wave

A/V RECEIVER

Filter 1

Filter 2

Filter 3

63 5.0

10 120 5.0

10 201 5.0

10 +10.0

16 32 63 125 250 500 1k Hz

Exit Finish Exit Return

Precision Distance is only for

SC-LX82.

2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave

Control.

• Filter Channel – Select the channel to which you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel and subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).

• TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is

SW ) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compensate for the difference in output post-filter).

Note

1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.

• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).

2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio options on page 85 for more on this.

3 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.

• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.

• When Standing Wave is selected for an MCACC preset memory where STAND.WAVE

is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER ,

STAND.WAVE

ON is automatically selected.

111

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 112 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

112

• Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where

Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation

( ATT , the amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust

• Default setting: ON 1

/ 0.0dB

(all channels/bands)

Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 107, you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits your tastes.

1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

• The OVER!

indicator shows in the display if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort. If this happens, bring the level down until

OVER!

disappears from the display.

Tip

• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use

/



to select TRIM , then use

/

to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It can also provide you with a graphical output of the frequency response of your room.

1c.Manual MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

1. Fine Channel Level

2. Fine SP Distance

3. Standing Wave

4. EQ Adjust

5. EQ Professional

6. Precision Distance

Exit Return

Precision Distance is only for

SC-LX82.

2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your liking.

Ch : L 0.0

1c4.EQ Adjust

A/V RECEIVER

-8.0

-6.0

0.0

+3.0

+8.5

+3.0

0.0

MCACC

M1.MEMORY1

TRIM

Exit Finish

Use

/

to select the channel.

Use

/

to select the frequency and

/

to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of the screen and press



to return to Ch , then use

/

to select the channel.

How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that different channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics, select EQ Pro & S-Wave (or ALL ) for the

Auto MCACC setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 107 to calibrate the room automatically. This should provide a balanced calibration that suits the characteristics of your listening room.

If you still aren’t satisfied with the results, the manual

Advanced EQ Setup (below) provides a more customized calibration of your system using the direct sound of the speakers. This is done with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer (with software available from Pioneer

— see Output PC on page 117).

How to interpret the graphical output

The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this usually takes about 100 ms or so).

Note

1 You can switch on or off the Acoustic Calibration EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio options on page 85 for more on this.

2 When EQ Adjust is selected for an MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER , EQ ON is automatically selected.

3 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer (with software available from Pioneer—see Output PC on page 117 for more on this).

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 113 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how your room is responding to certain frequencies.

Differences in channel level and speaker distance are taken into account automatically (compensation is provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency measurements can be examined both with and without the equalization performed by this receiver.

• Reverb characteristics for different channels –

Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for each channel. Since this difference increases as the sound is influenced by the various room characteristics, it is often better to capture a frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of channel frequencies/sounds.

Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional according to your room characteristics

Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing the time that is best for system calibration with your particular room characteristics.

Level

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range

Front L

Front R

Conventional MCACC

EQ calibration range

160

Time

(in msec)

The graph below shows the difference between conventional acoustic calibration and professional calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).

Level

0 80

If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often not necessary to make a 30-50ms setting. Later time settings may provide a more detailed sound experience with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what works best for your particular room.

Test tone

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range

Conventional MCACC

EQ calibration range

160

Time

(in msec)

Note that changing the room (for example, moving furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.

In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.

Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls, furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the room. We recommend an earlier time setting of 30-50ms to compensate for two major factors that will influence the sound of most rooms:

• Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –

Depending on your room, you may find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).

This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the measurement is done too late.

1 Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.

1c.Manual MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

1. Fine Channel Level

2. Fine SP Distance

3. Standing Wave

4. EQ Adjust

5. EQ Professional

6. Precision Distance

Exit Return

Precision Distance is only for

SC-LX82.

1c5.EQ Professional

A/V RECEIVER a. Reverb Measurement b. Reverb View c. Advanced EQ Setup

Exit Return

Level

Low frequencies

High frequencies

2 Select an option and press ENTER.

• Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical output using a PC, see Connecting a PC for Advanced

MCACC output on page 40 to connect an RS-232C cable before selecting this option).

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range

Conventional MCACC

EQ calibration range

160

Time

(in msec)

• Reverb View – You can check the reverb measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each channel.

Note

1 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most obvious when comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.

2 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45 or Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph.

With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the Reverb

Measurement function.

113

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 114 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

114

• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and calibration, based on the reverb measurement of your listening area. Note that customizing system calibration using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically setting up for surround sound

(Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 107 and is not necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.

3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ

ON or OFF, and then START.

1c5a.Reverb Measurement

A/V RECEIVER

Reverb Measure with : EQ OFF

START

Exit Cancel

The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in

Reverb View and Output PC (see Connecting a PC for

Advanced MCACC output on page 40):

• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by this receiver (before calibration).

• EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this receiver (after calibration).

Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments necessary for your listening area.

When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select

Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 134 for troubleshooting information.

4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN when you’re done.

1c5b.Reverb View

A/V RECEIVER

Channel : Front

Frequency :

Calibration :

63Hz

After

16 kHz

8 kHz

4 kHz dB

63.0

61.0

59.0

2 kHz

1 kHz

500 Hz

250 Hz

125 Hz

63 Hz

57.0

55.0

53.0

0 40 80

M1.MEMORY 1

SYMMETRY

120 160 ms

Exit Return

The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full

Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements are conducted.

Use

/

to select the channel, frequency and calibration setting you want to check. Use

/

to go back and forth between the three. The reverb characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can be displayed by selecting Calibration : Before / After .

Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.

5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the

MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired time setting for calibration, and then select START.

Based on the reverb measurement above, you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting. For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we recommend using the 30-50ms setting.

1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup

A/V RECEIVER

Time Position

EQ Type

STAND.WAVE Multi-P :

30-50ms

: SYMMETRY

1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup

A/V RECEIVER

Time Position

EQ Type

STAND.WAVE Multi-P :

30-50ms

SYMMETRY

START START

Exit Cancel Exit Cancel

Use

/

to select the setting. Use

/

to switch between them.

Select the setting from the following time periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms , 10-30ms , 20-40ms , 30-50ms , 40-

60ms , 50-70ms and 60-80ms . This setting will be applied to all channels during calibration.

When you’re finished, select START . It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.

After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are given the option to check the settings on-screen.

Precision Distance

(SC-LX82 only)

Before using this function, perform the Full Auto MCACC

Setup procedure (see page 45). Performing the Full Auto

MCACC procedure corrects the distance to a precision of

1 cm, but the Precision Distance function lets you adjust the distance to the speakers (their position) with a precision of under 1 cm. Here, rather than correct the

Note

1 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, exit the HOME MENU and press MCACC to select it before pressing HOME MENU .

2 After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY ( Full Auto MCACC , etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View . To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON .

3 The After display when measurements have been made using the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC ( ALL ) function shows the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics after EQ Type : SYMMETRY calibration.

4 The reverb characteristics graph is overwritten each time the reverberations are measured. No Data is displayed if there is no reverb characteristic data, for example before measurements have been taken.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 115 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

11 numerical value of the distance, actually move the physical positions of the speakers to fine-adjust (the subwoofer cannot be adjusted). The input from the microphone is indicated on the screen. Fine-adjust the positions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum. The detailed distance adjustments that were previously performed by skilled installers by ear can easily be performed watching the gauge on the monitor.

Place the microphone in the same position as when the microphone was connected and the Full Auto MCACC operation was performed.

1 Select ‘Precision Distance’ from the Manual

MCACC setup menu.

1c.Manual MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

1. Fine Channel Level

2. Fine SP Distance

3. Standing Wave

4. EQ Adjust

5. EQ Professional

6. Precision Distance

1c6.Precision Distance

A/V RECEIVER

CAUTION

Loud test tones will be output.

Please wait...**

Exit Return Exit Cancel

2 Fine-adjust the positions of the speakers in sequence, starting from the front right channel.

Test pulses are output from the speaker for the selected channel and from one other speaker. Move the position of the selected speaker 1 cm towards or away from the microphone. Watch the screen when doing so, and fineadjust the positions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum. Also, the channel serving as the standard differs according to the channel being adjusted. Do not move the speaker serving as the standard channel.

The maximum gauge reading is 10.0. (If the reading stays under 10.0, adjust the speaker for the maximum value.)

1c6.Precision Distance

A/V RECEIVER

Reference Ch : L

Adjust Ch : R

2.0

Exit Finish

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Checking MCACC Data

At the procedure of Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45, the procedure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 107 or after fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 109, you can check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen or, if a computer is connected, on the computer’s screen.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your

TV. Use

///

and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the HOME

MENU.

HOME MENU

A/V RECEIVER

1. Advanced MCACC

2. MCACC Data Check

3. Data Management

4. System Setup

2.MCACC Data Check

A/V RECEIVER a. Speaker Setting b. Channel Level c. Speaker Distance d. Standing Wave e. Acoustic Cal EQ f. Group Delay g. Output PC

Exit Return Exit Return

3 Select the setting you want to check.

• Speaker Setting – Used to check the settings of the speaker systems. See Speaker Setting on page 116 for more on this.

• Channel Level – Used to check the output level of the different speakers. See Channel Level on page 116 for more on this.

• Speaker Distance – Used to check the distance to the different speakers. See Speaker Distance on page 116 for more on this.

• Standing Wave – Used to check the standing wave control filter settings. See Standing Wave on page 116 for more on this.

• Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check the calibration values of the listening environment’s frequency response. See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 117 for more on this.

Note

1 • If the microphone is placed in a different position from when the Auto MCACC procedure was performed, it may not be possible to adjust properly. In this case, we recommend performing the procedure at Fine Speaker Distance on page 111 in the Auto MCACC custom measurements, then performing the adjustment described here without moving the microphone.

• The adjustment here is for adjusting for an error of 1 cm or less (not adjustable with the Auto MCACC Setup). 0.0 may be displayed after distance correction with the Auto MCACC Setup, but even in this case this adjustment allows you to optimize the correction. Note that if the Auto MCACC Setup is performed after completing the fine-adjustment here, the correction precision will drop to about 1 cm.

• Like with the Auto MCACC Setup, perform this adjustment in as quiet an environment as possible. 0.0 will be displayed if abrupt noise is input during the adjustment.

• The distance for all the channels can only be made uniform even if the R (front right) channel is adjusted in the proper order.

• Be very careful not to tip the speakers over when moving them.

• The result of the adjustment performed here can be checked by listening to the test pulses output at the Precision Distance (SC-LX82 only) on page 114

(the test pulses will be more centrally positioned between the speakers than before the adjustment was performed). Be careful not to change the distance values at this time.

115

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 116 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

• Group Delay – Used to check the speakers’ group delay (both before and after calibration). See Group

Delay on page 117 for more on this.

• Output PC – See Output PC on page 117 for more on this.

4 Press RETURN to go back to MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the HOME MENU .

Speaker Setting

Use this to display the speaker size and number of speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 121 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data

Check menu.

2a.Speaker Setting

A/V RECEIVER

Front : LARGE

Center : LARGE

Surr : LARGE

SW : YES

Exit Return

2 Select the channel you want to check.

Use

/

to select the channel. The corresponding channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.

Channel Level

Use this to display the level of the various channels. See

Channel Level on page 122 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data

Check menu.

2b.Channel Level

A/V RECEIVER

MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1

Exit Return

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use

/

to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The level of the various channels set at the selected

MCACC preset is displayed. ‘ --’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

Speaker Distance

Use this to display the distance from the different channels to the listening position. See Speaker Distance on page 123 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data

Check menu.

2c.Speaker Distance

A/V RECEIVER

MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1

Exit Return

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use

/

to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The distance from the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘ --’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

Standing Wave

Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing

Wave on page 111 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data

Check menu.

Filter

Channel

2d.Standing Wave

A/V RECEIVER

Filter 1

Freq

[Hz]

Q ATT

[dB]

Filter 2

Freq

[Hz]

Q ATT

[dB]

Filter 3

Freq

[Hz]

Q ATT

[dB]

TRIM

[dB]

MCACC dB

M1.MEMORY1

63 5.0

10 120 5.0

10 201 5.0

10 +10.0

16 32

Exit

63 125 250 500 1k Hz

Return

2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use

/

to select the channel for which you want to check standing wave control.

The standing wave related calibration value for the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

3 Press



to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use

/

to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

116

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 117 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

Acoustic Cal EQ

Use this to display the calibration values for the frequency response of the various channels set in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ

Adjust on page 112 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data

Check menu.

Ch : L

2e.Acoustic Cal EQ

A/V RECEIVER

0.0

-8.0

-6.0

0.0

+3.0

+8.5

+3.0

0.0

MCACC

M1.MEMORY1

TRIM

Exit Return

2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use

/

to select the channel.

The calibration value for the frequency response of the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

3 Press



to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use

/

to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

Group Delay

Use this to display the calibrated speaker group delay results. See Using Full Band Phase Control on page 66 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Group Delay’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2f.Group Delay

A/V RECEIVER

Channel : Front

Calibration : Before

Front

Center

Surr

SB ms

2.0

1.4

0.8

0.2

-0.4

-1.0

200 2k

Exit

20k Hz

Return

2 When ‘Channel’ is highlighted, use

/

to select the channel you want to check.

The result of group delay calibration for the selected channel is displayed.

When measurements have been performed with Full

Auto MCACC selected at Advanced MCACC or with ALL or Full Band Phase Ctrl selected when Auto MCACC is selected, the graph before group delay calibration is also displayed.

When After is selected at Calibration , the group delay after calibration is displayed. Compared to when Before is selected, with After there is less difference in the delay between frequency bands and the group delay between the different channels is uniform, allowing you to check the full band phase control effect.

No Data is displayed if the selected group delay has not been measured.

Output PC

Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 2 in Checking MCACC Data on page 115. The data measured with the Advanced MCACC function is transmitted to the connected computer.

The 3D graphs of the reverb characteristics and group delay characteristics before and after calibration and the

MCACC results (parameters) can be checked.

1 Select ‘Output PC’ from MCACC Data Check menu and press ENTER.

When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the

MCACC application on your PC shows on the GUI screen.

2g.Output PC

A/V RECEIVER

Start the MCACC application on your PC.

Exit Cancel

2 Start the MCACC application on your computer.

Follow the instructions provided with the application. It will take about ten seconds for the transmission to complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on your computer. The various parameters, the reverb characteristics and group delay characteristics data used for display on the computer are not cleared when the power is turned off. If the reverb characteristics are re-measured, however, the data is overwritten.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the MCACC Data Check menu.

Continue with other operations in the MCACC Data

Check menu if necessary. Press RETURN again to exit the MCACC Data Check menu.

Note

1 To transmit data, the receiver and computer must be connected using an RS-232C cable and a special application must be installed on the computer. See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 40 for more on this.

2 Only one set of reverb characteristics is stored on the receiver. If you wish to compare several different measurement results, transmit the data to the computer each time reverb measurements are taken.

117

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 118 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

118

Data Management

This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your system for different listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the same listening position).

This is useful for alternate settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

From this menu you can copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don’t need.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your

TV. Use

///

and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Data Management’ from the HOME MENU.

Renaming MCACC presets

If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re using, you may want to rename them for easier identification.

1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data

Management setup menu.

3.Data Management

A/V RECEIVER a. Memory Rename b. MCACC Memory Copy c. MCACC Memory Clear

3a.Memory Rename

A/V RECEIVER

MCACC Position Rename

Exit Return Exit Finish

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name.

Use

/

to select the preset, then

/

to select a preset name.

3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary, then press RETURN when you’re finished.

You will return to the Data Management setup menu.

HOME MENU

A/V RECEIVER

1. Advanced MCACC

2. MCACC Data Check

3. Data Management

4. System Setup

3.Data Management

A/V RECEIVER a. Memory Rename b. MCACC Memory Copy c. MCACC Memory Clear

Exit Return Exit Return

3 Select the setting you want to adjust.

• Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets below).

• MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one

MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC preset data below).

• MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on page 119).

Copying MCACC preset data

If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration

EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 109), we recommend copying your current settings

to an unused

MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a reference point from which to start.

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data

Management setup menu.

3.Data Management

A/V RECEIVER a. Memory Rename b. MCACC Memory Copy c. MCACC Memory Clear

3b.MCACC Memory Copy

A/V RECEIVER

Copy : All

Exit Return Exit Cancel

2 Select the setting you want to copy.

• All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected

MCACC preset memory.

• Level & Distance – Copies only the channel level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.

3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy them (‘To’).

Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

Note

1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45 or Automatic MCACC

(Expert) on page 107, either of which you should have already completed.

2 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45 or Automatic MCACC

(Expert) on page 107.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 119 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.

When MCACC Memory Copy?

is displayed, select YES .

If NO is selected, the memory is not copied.

Completed!

shows in the GUI screen to confirm the

MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.

Clearing MCACC presets

If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset.

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data

Management setup menu.

3.Data Management

A/V RECEIVER a. Memory Rename b. MCACC Memory Copy c. MCACC Memory Clear

3c.MCACC Memory Clear

A/V RECEIVER

Exit Return Exit Cancel

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.

Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.

When MCACC Memory Clear?

is displayed, select YES .

If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared.

Completed!

shows in the GUI screen to confirm the

MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.

119

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 120 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The system and the other setup

120

Chapter 12:

The system and the other setup

Important

• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME

MENU .

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU, then press ENTER.

HOME MENU

A/V RECEIVER

1. Advanced MCACC

2. MCACC Data Check

3. Data Management

4. System Setup

Making receiver settings from the

System Setup menu

The following section describes how to change the speaker-related settings manually and make various other settings (input selection, OSD language selection, etc.).

SC-LX82:

MAIN

ZONE2

SOURCE

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD BD TV DVR

HDMI

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY VIDEO1

USB iPod

VIDEO2

MULTI CH

CD-R TUNER

INPUT SELECT

SC-LX72:

SOURCE

TVCONTROL

VOL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TUNE

PARAMETER

TOOLS

VIDEO

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET

PTY

SEARCH iPod CTRL

STATUS

HOME

MENU

TUNE

PHASE CTRL

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

CH LEVEL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

SOURCE

TOP MENU

BAND

DVD BD DVR HDMI

PRESET

TV CD CD-R

HOME MEDIA

GALLERY iPod USB TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

PTY

SEARCH

HOME

MENU iPod CTRL

TUNE

T.EDIT

GUIDE

PRESET

TV/DTV MPX PQLS

AUDIO INFO

DISP

MULTI OPE TV CTRL

REMOTE

SETUP

ZONE 2

MAIN

ZONE 3

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.

Use the  RECEIVER button to switch on.

• If headphones are connected to the receiver, disconnect them.

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your

TV. Use

///

and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu.

Exit Return

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

4.System Setup

A/V RECEIVER a.Manual SP Setup b. Input Setup c. OSD Language d. Other Setup

Exit Return

• Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of connection used for surround back terminals and the size, number distance and overall balance of the connected speakers (see Manual speaker setup on page 121).

• Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see

The Input Setup menu on page 47).

• OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display language can be changed (see Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) on page 44).

• Other Setup – Changes customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver (see The Other

Setup menu on page 125).

Note

1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.

2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when either the HOME MEDIA GALLERY or iPod/USB input function is selected or the headphones are connected. When you set ZONE 2 , ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 88), you can’t use the HOME MENU .

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 121 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The system and the other setup

Manual speaker setup

This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).

These settings are designed to customize your system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in

Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto

MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45, it isn’t necessary to make all of these settings.

Surround back speaker setting

• Default setting: Normal

There are several ways you can use the surround back speaker channels with this system. In addition to a normal home theater setup where they are used for the surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the front speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room.

1 Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the Manual SP

Setup menu.

See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 120 if you’re not already at this screen.

4a.Manual SP Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. Surr Back System

2. Speaker Setting

3. Channel Level

4. Speaker Distance

5. X-Curve

6. THX Audio Setting

4a1.Surr Back System

A/V RECEIVER

Normal

Front : Normal

Center : Normal

CAUTION

• The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are output at high volume.

1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.

See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 120 if you’re not already at this screen.

4.System Setup

A/V RECEIVER a.Manual SP Setup b. Input Setup c. OSD Language d. Other Setup

4a.Manual SP Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. Surr Back System

2. Speaker Setting

3. Channel Level

4. Speaker Distance

5. X-Curve

6. THX Audio Setting

Exit Return Exit Return

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

• Surr Back System – Specifies how you are using your surround back speakers (see below).

• Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of speakers you’ve connected (see below).

• Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your speaker system (page 122).

• Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your speakers from the listening position (page 123).

• X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker system for movie soundtracks (page 123).

• THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you are using a THX speaker setup (page 124).

3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

Exit Return Exit Return

2 Select the surround back speaker setting.

• Normal – Select for normal home theater use with surround back speakers in your main (speaker system A) setup.

• Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room (see Switching the speaker system on page 88).

• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re biamping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your speakers on page 25).

• ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 88).

3 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.

If No is selected, the setting is not changed.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Speaker Setting

Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration

(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency)

. It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in

Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto

MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45 are correct. Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set independently.

Note

1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL .

121

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 122 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The system and the other setup

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

4a.Manual SP Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. Surr Back System

2. Speaker Setting

3. Channel Level

4. Speaker Distance

5. X-Curve

6. THX Audio Setting

4a2.Speaker Setting

A/V RECEIVER

Front : LARGE

Center : LARGE

Surr : LARGE

SB : LARGE x 2

SW : YES

X.OVER : 80Hz

Exit Return Exit Return

2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set, then select a speaker size.

Use

/

to select the size (and number) of each of the following speakers:

• Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.

• Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select

SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to the front speakers).

• Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select

SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer).

• SB – Select the number of surround back speakers you have (one, two or none).

Select LARGEx2 or

LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or

SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose NO .

• SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when

YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer).

If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass frequencies are output from other speakers).

3 Select ‘X.OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.

Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Channel Level

Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor when setting up a home theater system.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

4a.Manual SP Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. Surr Back System

2. Speaker Setting

3. Channel Level

4. Speaker Distance

5. X-Curve

6. THX Audio Setting

4a3.Channel Level

A/V RECEIVER

MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1

Test Tone : AUTO

Exit Return Exit Return

2 Select a setup option.

• MANUAL – Move the test tone manually from speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel levels.

• AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves from speaker to speaker automatically.

122

Note

1 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES . Also, the center, surround and surround back speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL . In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.

2 • If you selected Speaker B , ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 121) you can’t adjust the surround back settings.

• If the surround speakers are set to NO , the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO .

• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.

3 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.

4 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE , or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL . It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.

• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz .

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 123 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The system and the other setup

3 Confirm your selected setup option.

The test tones will start after you press ENTER .

4a3.Channel Level

A/V RECEIVER

CAUTION

Loud test tones will be output.

Please wait...**

2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using

/

You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.01 m increments.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Exit Cancel

4 Adjust the level of each channel using

/

If you selected MANUAL , use

/

to switch speakers.

The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown on-screen:

4a3.Channel Level

A/V RECEIVER

MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1

Tip

• For best surround sound, make sure the surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position.

X-Curve

Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks.

1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

4a.Manual SP Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. Surr Back System

2. Speaker Setting

3. Channel Level

4. Speaker Distance

5. X-Curve

6. THX Audio Setting

Exit Finish

Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Tip

• You can change the channel levels by set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press CH

LEVEL , and then using

/

on the remote control.

Speaker Distance

For good sound depth and separation from your system, you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP

Setup menu.

4a.Manual SP Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. Surr Back System

2. Speaker Setting

3. Channel Level

4. Speaker Distance

5. X-Curve

6. THX Audio Setting

Exit

4a4.Speaker Distance

A/V RECEIVER

MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1

Return

SBR : 5.77m

SBL : 5.13m

SW : 3.54m

Exit Finish

Exit Return

2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.

Use

/

to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at

2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct ). Use the following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your room size:

Room size (m

)

≤

300

X-Curve (dB/oct) –0.5

–1.0

–1.5

–2.0

–2.5

≤

1000

–3.0

• If you select OFF , the frequency curve will be flat and the X-Curve has no effect.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

Note

1 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).

• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.

2 The channel level cannot be adjusted using this procedure while making settings on HOME MENU .

3 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on page 60).

123

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 124 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The system and the other setup

THX Audio Setting

This menu allows the user to adjust various THX features including Loudness Plus, SB Speaker Position, THX

Ultra2/Select2

Subwoofer (on/off), and Boundary Gain

Control. Please see page 141 for a details regarding these

THX features.

1 Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP

Setup menu.

4a.Manual SP Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. Surr Back System

2. Speaker Setting

3. Channel Level

4. Speaker Distance

5. X-Curve

6. THX Audio Setting

If your subwoofer isn’t THX Ultra2/Select2

certified, but you still want to switch boundary gain compensation on, select YES here, but the effect might not work properly.

5 Select either ON or OFF for Boundary Gain

Compensation (BGC) setting.

4a6.THX Audio Setting

A/V RECEIVER

Loudness Plus :

SB SP Position :

THX Select2 SW :

1.2 m<

YES

Exit Finish

6 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Exit Return

2 Select either ON or OFF for THX Loudness Plus setting.

4a6.THX Audio Setting

A/V RECEIVER

Loudness Plus :

SB SP Position :

THX Select2 SW :

1.2 m<

YES

Exit Finish

3 Specify the distance of your surround back speakers from each other.

4a6.THX Audio Setting

A/V RECEIVER

Loudness Plus :

SB SP Position :

THX Select2 SW :

1.2 m<

YES

Exit Finish

• 0–0.3 m – Surround back speakers within 30 cm apart.

• >0.3–1.2 m – Surround back speakers between

30 cm and 1.2 m apart.

• 1.2 m< – Surround back speakers more than 1.2 m apart (default).

4 Specify whether your subwoofer is THX Ultra2/

Select2

certified or not.

4a6.THX Audio Setting

A/V RECEIVER

Loudness Plus :

SB SP Position :

THX Select2 SW :

1.2 m<

YES

124

Exit Finish

Note

1 Ultra2 for the SC-LX82, Select2 for the SC-LX72.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 125 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The system and the other setup

The Other Setup menu

The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your

TV. Use

///

and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU.

3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.

4.SystemSetup

A/V RECEIVER a.Manual SP Setup b. Input Setup c. OSD Language d. Other Setup

4d.Other Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. KURO LINK Setup

2. Multi Ch In Setup

3. ZONE Audio Setup

4. Power ON Level Setup

5. Volume Limit Setup

6. Remote Control Mode Setup

7. Flicker Reduction Setup

Multi Channel Input Setup

You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multichannel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is selected as an input function, you can display the video images of other input functions. In the Multi Channel

Input Setup, you can assign a video input to the multichannel input.

1 Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

4d.Other Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. KURO LINK Setup

2. Multi Ch In Setup

3. ZONE Audio Setup

4. Power ON Level Setup

5. Volume Limit Setup

6. Remote Control Mode Setup

7. Flicker Reduction Setup

Exit

4d2.Multi Ch In Setup

A/V RECEIVER

SW Input Gain

Video Input

0dB

DVD

Return

2 Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.

• 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level originally recorded on the source.

• +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level increased by 10 dB.

Exit Return Exit Return

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

• KURO LINK Setup – Synchronizes this receiver with your Pioneer component supporting KURO LINK (see

KURO LINK Setup on page 82).

• Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings for a multi-channel input (below).

• ZONE Audio Setup – Specifies the volume setting for a MULTI-ZONE setup (page 126).

• Power ON Level Setup – Specifies the volume level set when the power is turned on (page 126).

• Volume Limit Setup – Limits the maximum volume

(page 126).

• Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this receiver’s remote control mode (page 127).

• Flicker Reduction – Adjusts the way the GUI screen looks (page 127).

5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

Exit Finish

3 Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.

When the multi-channel input is selected as an input function, you can display the video images of other input functions. The video input can be selected from the following: DVD , TV/SAT , DVR , VIDEO 1 , VIDEO 2 , OFF .

4d2.Multi Ch In Setup

A/V RECEIVER

SW Input Gain

Video Input

+10dB

DVD

Exit Finish

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

125

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 126 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The system and the other setup

ZONE Audio Setup

If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see Using the

MULTI-ZONE controls on page 88), you may need to specify your volume setting.

1 Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

4d.Other Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. KURO LINK Setup

2. Multi Ch In Setup

3. ZONE Audio Setup

4. Power ON Level Setup

5. Volume Limit Setup

6. Remote Control Mode Setup

7. Flicker Reduction Setup

4d3.ZONE Audio Setup

A/V RECEIVER

ZONE 2 Volume Level : Variable

ZONE 3 Volume Level : Variable

Power ON Level Setup

The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same level when the receiver’s power is turned on.

1 Select ‘Power ON Level Setup’ from the Other

Setup menu.

4d.Other Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. KURO LINK Setup

2. Multi Ch In Setup

3. ZONE Audio Setup

4. Power ON Level Setup

5. Volume Limit Setup

6. Remote Control Mode Setup

7. Flicker Reduction Setup

4d4.Power ON Level Setup

A/V RECEIVER

Power ON Level : LAST

Exit Return Exit Finish

2 Select the volume level setting of ZONE 2

and

ZONE 3.

• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.

• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX receiver) in the sub room and want to use that receiver’s volume controls.

With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is quite low in the sub zone at first, and then experiment to find the correct level.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Exit Return Exit Finish

2 Select the Power ON Level setting you want.

• LAST – When the power is turned on, the volume is set to the same level as when the power was last turned off.

• “ --” – When the power is turned on, the volume is set to minimum level.

• –80.0dB

to +12.0dB

– Specify the volume to be set when the power is turned, in steps of 0.5 dB.

It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the value specified at Volume Limit Setup.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Volume Limit Setup

Use this function to limit the maximum volume. The volume cannot be increased above the level set here, even by operating MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial on the front panel).

1 Select ‘Volume Limit Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

4d.Other Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. KURO LINK Setup

2. Multi Ch In Setup

3. ZONE Audio Setup

4. Power ON Level Setup

5. Volume Limit Setup

6. Remote Control Mode Setup

7. Flicker Reduction Setup

4d5.Volume Limit Setup

A/V RECEIVER

Volume Limit : OFF

Exit Return Exit Finish

2 Select the Volume Limit setting you want.

• OFF – The maximum volume is not limited.

• –20.0dB

/ –10.0dB

/ 0.0dB

– The maximum volume is limited to the value set here.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

126

Note

1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 121, you won’t be able to change the volume level.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 127 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

The system and the other setup

Remote Control Mode Setup

• Default setting: 1

This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver are being used.

1 Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the

Other Setup menu.

4d.Other Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. KURO LINK Setup

2. Multi Ch In Setup

3. ZONE Audio Setup

4. Power ON Level Setup

5. Volume Limit Setup

6. Remote Control Mode Setup

7. Flicker Reduction Setup

4d6.Remote Control Mode Setup

A/V RECEIVER

Remote Control Mode : 1

Exit Return Exit Cancel

2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.

3 Select “OK” to change the remote control mode.

4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote control’s setting.

See Operating multiple receivers ( SC-LX82: page 93,

SC-LX72: page 100).

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Flicker Reduction Setup

• Default setting: 4

The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased. If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try changing this setting.

Note that the resolution in this setting only affects the

GUI screen; it has no influence on the video output.

1 Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the Other

Setup menu.

4d.Other Setup

A/V RECEIVER

1. KURO LINK Setup

2. Multi Ch In Setup

3. ZONE Audio Setup

4. Power ON Level Setup

5. Volume Limit Setup

6. Remote Control Mode Setup

7. Flicker Reduction Setup

4d7.Flicker Reduction Setup

A/V RECEIVER

Flicker Reduction : 4

Exit Return Exit

2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want.

Finish

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Note

1 If you change this receiver’s setting, also change the setting on the remote control.

127

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 128 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

128

Chapter 13:

Additional information

Speaker Setting Guide

In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is important to accurately position the speakers and make their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to finely focus the multi-channel sound.

The three major elements in positioning the speakers are distance , angle and orientation (the direction in which the speakers are pointing).

Distance : The distance of all the speakers should be equal.

Angle : The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical.

Orientation : The orientation should be horizontally symmetrical.

In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is possible to automatically correct the speaker distance electrically to a precision of 1 cm using the Auto MCACC

Setup function (page 45) and to adjust precisely using the procedure described at Precision Distance (SC-LX82 only) (page 114). For the volume and sound quality as well, accurate sound field correction using the equalizer and speaker phase characteristic correction using the

Full Band Phase Control function (page 65) together make it possible to achieve the ideal listening environment.

Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment

Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers are steady, and leave at least 10 cm from the surrounding walls. Position the speakers attentively so that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles from the listening position (center of the adjustments). (We recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the layout.) Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant from the listening position.

Tip

• If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a circle), use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance correction and Fine Speaker Distance (or Precision

Distance – SC-LX82 only ) functions to make them equalize the distance artificially.

Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height

Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.

Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.

If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point it to the listening position.

Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height of the ears.

Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation

If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same direction, the tone will not be the same on the right and left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced properly. However, if all the speakers are pointed towards the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped.

Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel Research Group has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area

30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position (between the surround speakers and the listening position).

However, the sense of sound positioning can differ according to the conditions in the room and the speakers being used. In smaller environments in particular (when the front speakers are close to the listening position), with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward.

We suggest you use this example of installation as reference when trying out different installation methods.

Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer

Placing the subwoofer between the center and front speakers makes even music sources sound more natural

(If there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter if it is placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is placed on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not cancel out the bass sound output from the other speakers. Also note that placing it near a wall may result in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could excessively amplify the bass sound.

If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but depending on the shape of the room this could result in standing waves. However, even if standing waves are generated, their influence on the sound quality can be prevented using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave control function (page 116).

Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC

Setup (auto sound field correction) function

It is more effective to perform the Auto MCACC Setup

(page 45) (and Precision Distance (SC-LX82 only) on page 114) procedure once the adjustments described above have been completed.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 129 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

Tip

• The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger than the distance actually measured with a tape measure, etc. This is because this distance is corrected for electric delay, and is not a problem.

Positional relationship between speakers and monitor

Position of front speakers and monitor

The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible to the monitor.

Monitor

Position of center speaker and monitor

Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker, keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the screen makes the overall sound more natural. For TVs using Braun tubes, however, when installing the center speaker on the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point it towards the listening position.

Installation on floor (Diagram as seen from the side)

Monitor

L R

45° to 60°

• If the center speaker is not of the shielded type, install it away from the TV.

• When installing the center speaker on top of the monitor, place it facing slightly downwards towards the listening position.

Troubleshooting

Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.

Note

• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.

Power

Symptom

The power does not turn on.

Remedy

• Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.

• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.

Power cannot be turned off.

( ZONE 2 ON or ZONE 3 ON is displayed.)

• Set the remote control’s MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 , then press

 RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off.

The receiver suddenly switches off or the PHASE CONTROL indicator blinks.

• Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.

• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

During loud playback the power suddenly switches off.

• Turn down the volume.

• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 109.

• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press

 STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use

/

to select D.SAFETY  OFF  , and then use

/

to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY  OFF  to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be unavailable.

129

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 130 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

130

Symptom

The unit does not respond when the buttons are pressed.

Remedy

• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.

• Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.

AMP ERR blinks in the display, then the power automatically switches off. The power indicator blinks and the power does not turn on.

• Try tuning on the power after 1 minute.

AMP ERR blinks in the display, then the power automatically switches off. The ADVANCED

MCACC blinks and the power does not turn on.

• The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

The PQLS indicator flashes and power turns off. FAN STOP is displayed.

• There is a problem with the receiver’s fan. Try turning on the power. If the same thing happens, the receiver is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

The ADVANCED MCACC indicator flashes and power turns off.

AMP OVERHEAT (or

OVERHEAT ) and the power indicator flash and the power turns off.

• There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit. The receiver may have a serious problem. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on.

• Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.

The Receiver suddenly power off or the blue indicator at the center of the receiver flashes.

• The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

Display blinks 12V TRG ERR .

• An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn the power back on.

No sound

Symptom

No sound is output when an input function is selected.

No sound output from the front speakers.

Remedy

• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE ) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS ).

• Make sure the correct input function is selected.

• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.

• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL ). Note that when PCM is selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.

• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on page 19).

• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 23).

No sound from the surround or center speakers.

• Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 59).

• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 121).

• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 122).

• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 23).

No sound from surround back speakers.

• Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 121).

• Make sure surround back channel processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 63).

• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with surround back channel processing set to SBch Auto , there will be no sound from the surround back speakers. In this case, set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 63).

• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back channel processing is set to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on page 59).

• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 23).

If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 131 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

Symptom

No sound from subwoofer.

Remedy

• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.

• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.

• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 121).

• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 121).

• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES , or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 121).

• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF , or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options on page 85).

• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 122).

No sound from one speaker.

• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 23).

• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 122).

• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 121).

• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 59).

Sound is produced from analog components, but not from digital ones (DVD, LD,

CD-ROM, etc.).

• Check that the input signal type is set to to (see The Input Setup menu on page 47).

DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal

• Check the digital output settings on the source component.

on page 65).

• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected

• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.

• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input function.

No sound is output or a noise is output when Dolby Digital/DTS software is played back.

No sound when using the

HOME MENU .

• Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.

• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.

• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.

• If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the HOME MENU .

Additional information

Symptom

Everything seems to be set up correctly, but the playback sound is odd.

The PHASE CONTROL audible effect.

feature doesn’t seem to have an

Remedy

• The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 23).

• If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).

• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on page 123).

• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not causing interference.

Noise or hum can be heard even when there is no sound being input.

There seems to be a time lag between the speakers and the output of the subwoofer.

• See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45 to set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).

The maximum volume available (shown in the front panel display) is lower than the

+12dB maximum.

• Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Limit Setup on page 126).

Some of the input functions cannot be selected using the

INPUT SELECTOR on the front dial or INPUT SELECT on remote control.

• Make sure that the function is set to ON at the Input Skip function on the Input Setup menu

(page 47).

• Make sure that HDMI Input on the Input Setup menu is set to OFF (page 47).

Video

Symptom

No image is output when an input is selected.

Can’t record video.

Remedy

• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 32).

• For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another component are connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on page 87), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.

• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video,

HDMI or S-Video cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 47).

• Check the video output settings of the source component.

• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.

• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 87) and/or the resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video

Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 87) OFF .

• Check that the source is not copy-protected.

• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.

Noisy, intermittent, or distorted picture.

• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or composite), then start playback again.

Video signals are not output from the component terminal.

• When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component terminal and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may not be output to the monitor connected to the component terminal. If this happens, do the following:

– Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal.

– Set RES on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu to PURE (page 87).

132

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 133 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

Settings

Symptom

The Auto MCACC Setup continually shows an error.

Remedy

• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 47). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 121).

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.

• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the surround back channel.

• Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

• If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:

– The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.

– If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be possible to properly identify the polarity.

– Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.

After using the Auto MCACC

Setup, the speaker size setting is incorrect.

• There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc.

Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.

• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 121, and use the ALL (Keep

SP System) option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 107 if this is a recurring problem.

SC-LX82 only:

Gauge (value) does not increase with the Precision

Distance adjustment.

• Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).

• Perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure before the Precision Distance adjustment (see

Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 45).

• Place the microphone accurately in the same position as when the Full Auto MCACC procedure was performed.

• Do not move the speaker used as the reference point. Also, adjust in order, starting from the front right speaker.

• When adjusting the speaker positions, do not move the speakers much; only move them about

2 cm towards or away from the microphone.

• If you forget exactly where the microphone should be positioned or if there are problems after the procedure has been performed repeatedly, re-calibrate the distance using the Full Auto MCACC procedure, then without moving the microphone redo the Precision Distance adjustment.

Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker

Distance setting (page 111) properly.

The display shows KEY LOCK

ON when you try to make settings.

• Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).

• With the receiver in standby, press key lock.

 STANDBY/ON while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the

Most recent settings have been erased.

• The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.

• Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones before unplugging the power cord.

The various system settings are not stored.

• After all the zones have been turned off, make sure the blue  STANDBY/ON light has gone out before unplugging.

133

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 134 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output

Symptom

The EQ response displayed in the graphical output following calibration does not appear entirely flat.

Remedy

• There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto

MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.

• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.

• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.

EQ adjustments made using the Manual MCACC setup on page 109 do not appear to change the graphical output.

Lower frequency response curves do not seem to have been calibrated for SMALL speakers.

• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.

• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.

• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is output for display.

Display

Symptom

The display is dark or off.

Remedy

• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.

After making an adjustment the display goes off.

You can’t get DIGITAL to display when using SIGNAL

SEL .

2 DIGITAL or DTS does not light when playing Dolby/DTS software.

When playing Dolby Digital or

DTS sources, the receiver’s format indicators do not light.

• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The

Input Setup menu on page 47).

• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input function.

• These indicators does not light if playback is paused.

• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.

• Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.

• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 65).

• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.

• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.

When playing certain discs, none of the receiver’s format indicators light.

• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.

When playing a disc with the listening mode set to Auto

Surround or ALC, 2 PL II or

Neo:6 appear on the receiver.

• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 65).

• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.

During playback of a Surround

EX or DTS-ES source on the

SBch AUTO setting, EX or ES does not appear, or the signal is not properly processed.

• The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1 compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 63), then switch to the THX Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 59).

During playback of DVD-Audio, the display shows PCM .

• This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction.

The power turns off automatically and some indicator flashes, or some indicator flashes and the power does not turn on.

• See the Power section (page 129).

134

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 135 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

Remote control

Symptom Remedy

Cannot be remote controlled.

• SC-LX82 – Set the remote control mode properly (see Operating multiple receivers on page 93).

• SC-LX72 – Set a 5-digit preset code corresponding to the receiver to be operated in the remote control (see Operating multiple receivers on page 100).

• Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 127).

• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 10).

• Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see

Operating range of remote control unit on page 10).

• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.

• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.

• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 39).

Other components can’t be operated with the system remote.

• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.

• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.

HDMI

Symptom

The HDMI indicator blinks continuously.

No picture or sound.

Remedy

• Check all the points below.

No picture.

No sound, or sound suddenly ceases.

Noisy or distorted picture.

HDCP ERROR display.

shows in the

• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCPcompatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-Video or composite video jacks.

• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver

(even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-Video or composite video jacks between source and receiver.

• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

• If video images do not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution, Deep Color or other setting for your component.

• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio output.

• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to

THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog audio connection.

• To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI™ Cable) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color feature.

• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 87).

• Set the HDMI output setting to the connected HDMI OUT terminal (in Switching the HDMI output on page 91).

• Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH .

• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.

• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.

• Check the audio output settings of the source component.

• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-Video or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.

135

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 136 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

Symptom

Amp-linked operation not possible using KURO LINK function.

Configuration A

Use component video cables to connect the video output of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s component video input. The receiver can then convert the analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal for transmission to the display. For this configuration, use the most convenient connection (digital is recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections.

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

Remedy

• Check the HDMI connections.

• The cable may be damaged.

• Select ON for the KURO LINK setting (see KURO LINK Setup on page 82).

• Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.

• Set the TV side KURO LINK setting to ON .

• Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to HDMI OUT 1 . Then turn on first the TV’s power, then this receiver’s power.

Important information regarding the HDMI connection

There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMIequipped component you are connecting–check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).

If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please try one of the following configurations when connecting up.

Configuration B

Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most convenient connection (digital is recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections. Set the display volume to minimum when using this configuration.

Symptoms Causes

Cannot access the network.

The LAN cable is not firmly connected.

Remedies

Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 69).

The router is not switched on.

Switch on the router.

Internet security software is currently installed in the connected component.

There are cases where a component with Internet security software installed cannot be accessed.

The audio component on the network which has been switched off is switched on.

Switch on the audio component on the network before switching on this receiver.

Playback does not start while

‘Connecting...’ continues to be displayed.

The component is currently disconnected from this receiver or the power supply.

Check whether the component is properly connected to this receiver or the power supply.

The PC or Internet radio is not properly operated.

The corresponding IP address is not properly set. Switch on the built-in DHCP server function of your router, or set up the network manually according to your network environment (page 76).

The IP address is being automatically configured. The automatic configuration process takes time.

Please wait.

136

Note

1 The picture quality will change slightly during conversion.

2 • If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can only receive HDMI video from the connected component.

• Depending on the component, audio output may be limited to the number of channels available from the connected display unit (for example audio output is reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio limitations).

• If you want to switch the input function, you’ll have to switch functions on both the receiver and your display unit.

• Since the sound is muted on the display when using the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on the display every time you switch input functions.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 137 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

Symptoms

The audio files stored on components on the network, such as a PC, cannot be played back.

Causes

Windows Media Player 11 is not currently installed on your PC.

Remedies

Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC

(page 69).

Audio files were recorded in formats other than

MP3, WAV (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, and

WMA.

Play back audio files recorded in MP3, WAV

(LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, or WMA. Note that some audio files recorded in these formats may not be played back on this receiver.

Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC are being played back on Windows Media Player 11 or

Windows Media Connect.

Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC cannot be played back on Windows Media Player

11 or Windows Media Connect. Try using another server. Refer to the operation manual supplied with your server.

The component connected to the network is not properly operated.

Check whether the component is affected by special circumstances or is in the sleep mode.

Try rebooting the component if necessary.

The component connected to the network does not permit file sharing.

Try changing the settings for the component connected to the network.

The folder stored on the component connected to the network has been deleted or damaged.

Check the folder stored on the component connected to the network.

Cannot access the component connected to the network.

The component connected to the network is not properly set.

If the client is automatically authorized, you need to enter the corresponding information again.

Check whether the connection status is set to “Do not authorize”.

Check the audio files stored on the component connected to the network.

There are no playable audio files on the component connected to the network.

Audio playback is undesirably stopped or disturbed.

The audio file currently being played back was not recorded in a format playable on this receiver.

Check whether the audio file was recorded in a format supported by this receiver.

Check whether the folder has been damaged or corrupted.

Note that there are cases where even the audio files listed as playable on this receiver cannot be played back or displayed (page 75).

Cannot access Windows

Media Player 11.

The LAN cable is currently disconnected.

There is heavy traffic on the network with the

Internet being accessed on the same network.

You are currently logged onto the domain through your PC with Windows XP installed.

Connect the LAN cable properly (page 69).

Use 100BASE-TX to access the components on the network.

Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine (page 71).

Cannot listen to Internet radio stations.

The firewall settings for components on the network are currently in operation.

Check the firewall settings for components on the network.

You are currently disconnected from the Internet. Check the connection settings for components on the network, and consult with your network service provider if necessary (page 76).

The Home Media Gallery cannot be operated with the buttons on the remote control.

The broadcasts from an Internet radio station are stopped or interrupted.

There are cases where you cannot listen to some

Internet radio stations even when they are listed in the list of Internet radio stations on this receiver

(page 72 and 138).

The remote control is not currently set to the

Home Media Gallery mode.

Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to set the remote control to the Home Media Gallery mode

(page 71).

137

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 138 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

138

About status messages

Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the Home Media Gallery.

Status messages

Please Wait

Connection Down

File Format Error

Track Not Found

Server Error

Server Disconnected empty

Preset Not Stored

Out of Range

License Error

Item Already Exists

Favorite List Full

Descriptions

A component on the network, including a PC, is currently being connected. Wait for a while.

The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed.

Cannot be played back for some reasons.

The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network.

The selected server cannot be accessed.

The server has been disconnected.

There are no files stored in the selected folder.

The selected Internet radio station is not currently registered and saved.

The value entered is beyond the permitted range of the network settings.

The license for the contents to be played back is invalid.

This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites folder has already been registered.

This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites folder but the

Favorites folder is already full.

USB interface

Symptoms

The folders/files stored on a

USB memory device are not displayed.

Causes

The folders/files are currently stored in a region other than the FAT (File Allocation Table) region.

Remedies

Store the folders/files in the FAT region.

The number of levels in a folder is more than 8.

Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to

8 (page 52).

There are more than 30 000 folders/files stored in a USB memory device.

Limit the maximum number of folders/files stored in a USB memory device to 30 000 (page 52).

A USB memory device is not recognized.

The audio files are copyrighted.

The USB memory device does not support the mass storage class specifications.

Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory device cannot be played back (page 52).

Try using a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications. Note that there are cases where even the audio files stored on a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications are not played back on this receiver (page 52).

Some formats of a USB memory device, including

NTFS and HFS, cannot be played back on this receiver.

Check whether the format of your USB memory device is either FAT 12, FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that the NTFS and HFS formats cannot be played back on this receiver (page 52).

The USB memory device is not connected properly.

A USB hub is currently being used.

Check the USB memory device connection, then switch on this receiver (page 42).

This receiver does not support a USB hub (page 52).

This receiver recognizes the USB memory device as a fraud.

Switch off and on again this receiver.

A USB memory device is connected and displayed, but the audio files stored on the USB memory device cannot be played back.

The file format cannot be properly played back on this receiver.

See the list of file formats that can be played back on this receiver (page 54).

If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:

• Press  STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.

• If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold  STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10 seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared.)

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 139 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

Surround sound formats

Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.

Dolby

The Dolby technologies are explained below. See www.dolby.com for more detailed information.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects; hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.

In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono, stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog

Normalization, attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve uniform playback level.

Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/ right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby

Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system extracts surround sound from sources as follows:

• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono surround) from any stereo source

• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo surround) from any stereo source

• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound

(stereo surround and surround back) from two channel or 5.1 (and 6.1) channel sources

With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver.

Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio technology for all high-definition programming and media. It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multichannel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the nextgeneration A/V receivers but remains fully compatible with all current A/V receivers.

Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby

Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended by directors and producers.

It also features multi-channel sound with discrete channel output, interactive mixing and streaming capability in advanced systems. Supported by High-

Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and video.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true high-definition entertainment experience on high-definition optical discs in the next generation. When coupled with high-definition video,

Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater experience with stunning sound and high-definition picture.

It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 full-range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz audio. It also features extensive metadata including dialogue normalization and dynamic range control.

Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for highdefinition audio and video.

HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas

Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than eight audio channels.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

139

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 140 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

140

DTS

The DTS technologies are explained below. See www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels, including an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved through the use of a low compression rate, and high rates of transmittance during playback.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES

Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.

DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel.

DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel information already encoded into the source, as well as its own processing to determine channel localization

(with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS

Neo:6 with two channel sources.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital

Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.

DTS-EXPRESS

DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD

DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio contents.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD

Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates, facilitating data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD format, which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These high data transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating the quality of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as intended by the creator of music or movies.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:

5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;

6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc. ©

Windows Media Audio 9 Professional

Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a discrete surround format developed by Microsoft

Corporation.

Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

About iPod

“Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 141 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

About THX

The THX technologies are explained below. See www.thx.com for more detailed information.

In case of SC-LX82

In case of SC-LX72

• THX Cinema processing

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by

THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.

Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).

• Re-Equalization

The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment.

• Timbre Matching

The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers.

• Adaptive Decorrelation

In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive

Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers— the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.

• THX Ultra2 Plus

Before any home theatre component can be THX Ultra2 Plus certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee that the

Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Ultra2 Plus requirements cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain.

• THX Select2 Plus

Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 Plus certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus requirements cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain.

141

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 142 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

• THX Surround EX

THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called

Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the

Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.

Only amplifier and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.

This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital

Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the

Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener.

• Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)

ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround

Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and

Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the room will provide the largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field.

ASA is used in three new modes; THX Ultra2/Select2 CINEMA, THX

Ultra2/Select2 MUSIC and THX Ultra2/Select2 GAMES.

• Boundary Gain Compensation™

Depending on the listener’s and the subwoofer’s position, the listener may experience an excessive bass effect. This feature compensates for excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect. This feature is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer certified to THX

Ultra2/Select2™ specifications.

• THX Music

For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.

• THX Games

For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX

Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.

• THX Loudness Plus Description

THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in

THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™ Certified amplifiers. With

THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX

Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response. This enables users to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX

Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of content.

• THX Ultra2/Select2 Cinema

THX Ultra2/Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds.

DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra2/Select2

Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.

Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Ultra2/Select2

Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.

• THX Ultra2/Select2 Music

For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Ultra2/Select2

Music mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.

• THX Ultra2/Select2 Games

For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX

Ultra2/Select2 Games mode should be selected. In this mode THX

ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital.

This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Ultra2/Select2

Games mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.

THX, the THX logo, Ultra2 Plus and Select2 Plus are trademarks of THX

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

142

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 143 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

About Neural – THX Surround

Neural-THX

Surround is taking surround sound to the next level. This revolutionary new technology delivers the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a format that is fully compatible with stereo from various content sources. Neural-THX

Surround enables 5.1, 6.1 and 7.1-channel support for gaming, movies and digital music. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by other playback modes, audiences will experience the deep ambience and subtle details of movies, music and games.

Neural-THX

Digital Music™ is a new surround mode specifically designed to enhance the playback of compressed digital music content.

It provides listeners with an expanded sound stage and clean surround experience, even with compressed audio sources such as MP3s and

Internet streams.

Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official surround sound format for TV sports broadcasting, 7.1 games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well as leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. And with this technology being used by sound designers during content creation, as well as embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX

Surround promises a listening experience that is true to the original mix.

For additional information, please visit www.neuralsurround.com.

This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio

Corporation and THX Ltd. PIONEER Corporation hereby grants the user a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of use to this product under USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other technology or trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural

Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX

About FLAC

FLAC Decoder

2007 Josh Coalson

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

• Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT

HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF

THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY

OF SUCH DAMAGE.

143

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 144 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats

The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see

Using Stream Direct on page 62) you have selected.

Stereo (2 channel) signal formats

Input signal format

Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Dolby Digital Surround

DTS Surround

Other stereo sources

Analog sources

PCM sources

DVD-A sources

SACD sources

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected

Dolby Digital Surround

DTS Surround

Other stereo sources

Analog sources

PCM sources

DVD-A sources

SACD sources

Auto Surround / ALC / DIRECT

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

Neo:6 CINEMA

Stereo playback

As above

2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE

Neo:6 CINEMA

Stereo playback

As above

PURE DIRECT

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

Neo:6 CINEMA

Stereo playback

ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

Stereo playback

As above

2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE

Neo:6 CINEMA

Stereo playback

ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

Stereo playback

As above

Multichannel signal formats

Input signal format

Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)

Auto Surround / ALC

DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)

DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding)

DTS-HD sources

Other 6.1/7.1 channel sources

Other 5.1 channel sources

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected

DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM

SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding)

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE a

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

DTS + Neo:6

Straight decoding

As above

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE a

Straight decoding

As above

PURE DIRECT / DIRECT

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE a

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

Straight decoding

As above

Straight decoding

As above

144

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 145 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

Specifications

• These specifications are applicable when the power supply is 230 V.

Audio section

Multi channel simultaneous power output (1 kHz, 1 %, 8

Ω

)

7 ch total . . . . . . . . . . . 770 W (SC-LX82), 700 W (SC-LX72)

Rated power output (1 kHz, 6

Ω

, 1 %)

Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 W + 190 W (SC-LX82)

180 W + 180 W (SC-LX72)

Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 W (SC-LX82)

180 W (SC-LX72)

Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 W + 190 W (SC-LX82)

180 W + 180 W (SC-LX72)

Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 W + 190 W (SC-LX82)

180 W + 180 W (SC-LX72)

Rated power output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8

Ω

, 0.09 %)

Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W + 140 W

Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W

Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W + 140 W

Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W + 140 W

Total Harmonic Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 %

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8

Ω

, 130 W + 130 W)

Guaranteed speaker impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Ω

to 16

Ω

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB

Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB

(Pure Direct Mode)

Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 mV/47 k

Ω

Output (Level/Impedance)

REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mV/2.2 k

Ω

Tuner Section

Frequency Range (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz

Antenna Input (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Ω

unbalanced

Frequency Range (AM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1700 kHz

Antenna (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna (balanced)

Video Section

Signal level

Composite/S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75

Ω

)

Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75

Ω

PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75

Ω

)

Corresponding maximum resolution

Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1080p (1125p)

(Video convert off)

Digital In/Out Section

HDMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin (Not DVI)

HDMI output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA

USB terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A) iPod terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB, and Video (Composite)

Network Section

LAN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX

Integrated control section

Control (SR) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . .Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)

Control (IR) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)

IR signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)

12 V Trigger terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)

12 V Trigger output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 V, Total 50 mA

RS-232C cable type . . . . . . . 9-pin, cross type, female-female

Miscellaneous

Power requirements . . . . . . . AC 220 V to 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 W

In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4 W (KURO LINK OFF)

0.6 W (KURO LINK ON)

Dimensions . . . . . . 420 (W) mm x 200 (H) mm x 460 (D) mm

Weight (without package) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5 kg

Furnished Parts Number

MCACC Setup microphone (APM7009). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Remote control unit (SC-LX82: AXD7540/SC-LX72: AXD7543)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

AA/IEC R6 dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 iPod cable (ADE7129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

These operating instructions

Note

• Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice, due to improvements.

Cleaning the unit

• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt.

• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or cleansers.

• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will corrode the surface.

This product includes FontAvenue

fonts licensed by NEC corporation.

FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation

145

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 146 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

146

Index

Numerics

12V trigger

A

Acoustic Cal EQ

117

Acoustic Calibration EQ

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust

112

Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

112

Advanced MCACC

106 – 119

Output PC

40 , 117

Advanced surround

Analog attenuator

Aspect

Audio cable

AUDIO PARAMETER

Auto delay

Auto level control (ALC)

58 , 144

Auto MCACC

107

Auto surround

58 , 144

B

Bass

Bi-amp

21 , 25 , 26 , 121

Bi-wiring

Brightness

C

Center Image

Center Width

Channel Level

116 , 122

Chroma Level

Contrast

CONTROL jack

D

Data Management

118

Deep Color

Default system settings

Demo

107

Detail

Dialog Enhancement

Digital Noise Reduction

Digital Video Conversion

Dimension

Display

17 , 90 , 134

Dolby

59 , 139

DTS

59 , 140

Dual Mono

Dynamic Range Control

E

Effect

F

Fine Channel Level

110

Fine Speaker Distance

111

Flicker Reduction

127

Front Stage Surround Advance

Full Band Phase Control

45 , 65

H

HDCP

HDMI

28 – 31 , 41 , 49 , 81 – 84 , 91 , 135

HDMI Audio

Hue

I

Input function

Default and possible settings

Input Setup

47 – 48

Input signal

iPod

42 , 50 – 51 , 140

Switching controls

IR jack

K

KURO LINK

31 , 81 – 84

L

LFE Attenuate

Loudness

M

Manual MCACC

109

Manual speaker setup

121

MCACC Data

115

MCACC preset

64 , 85 , 118

Midnight

Multi Zone

21 , 24 , 26 , 37 – 38 , 88 , 121 , 126

Multichannel analog input

33 , 50 , 125

N

Neural THX

55 , 143

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 147 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

Additional information

O

Optimum Surround

OSD Language (GUI)

P

Panorama

Phase control

Placing

Play

Power cord

Power ON Level

126

PQLS

Precision Distance

114

Pre-out

Progressive Motion

Pure direct

PureCinema

R

RDS

Recording

Remote control

10 , 14 , 93 – 99 , 100 – 105 , 127 , 135

Reset

Resolution

S

SACD Gain

Setup microphone

108

Sharpness

Sleep timer

Sound Delay

Sound Retriever

Speaker

21 – 26 , 128

Speaker B

21 , 24 , 26 , 88 , 121

Speaker Distance

116 , 123

Speaker Setting

116 , 121

Standard surround

Standing Wave

85 , 111

Status

Stereo

Stream direct

62 , 144

Surround back channel processing

Surround back speaker

121

Synchronized amp mode

System Setup

120

T

THX

22 , 107 , 124 , 141

Home THX

Tone Control

Treble

Troubleshooting

129

Tuner

35 , 55 – 56 , ??– 57

U

Up Mix

USB

42 , 52 – 54 , 138

Playable file formats

V

Video cable

Video converter

VIDEO PARAMETER

Volume Limit

126

W

WMA9

140

WMA9 Pro

X x.v.Color

X-Curve

123

Y

YNR

147

SC-LX82_LX72.book Page 148 Thursday, April 23, 2009 7:05 PM

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D. F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-427 0

K002_B_En

Published by Pioneer Corporation.

<ARB7422-A> Printed in

Operating Instructions audio/video multi-channel receiver

SC-LX

SC-LX

IMPORTANT

CAUTION

IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG

WARNING

WARNING

Operating Environment

Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries

WARNING

VENTILATION CAUTION

WARNING

Contents

Flow of settings on the receiver . . . . . 7

01 Before you start

02 Controls and displays

04 Basic Setup

03 Connecting your equipment

05 Basic playback

06 Listening to your system

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

08 KURO LINK

09 Using other functions

10 Controlling the rest of your system

(In case of SC-LX82)

10 Controlling the rest of your system

(In case of SC-LX72)

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

12 The system and the other setup

13 Additional information

Flow of settings on the receiver

Before you start

Chapter 1:

Before you start

Our philosophy

Features

Before you start

Checking what’s in the box

Before you start

Installing the receiver

Operating range of remote control unit

Loading the batteries

Controls and displays

Chapter 2:

Controls and displays

Remote control (In case of SC-LX82)

Controls and displays

Controls and displays

Controls and displays

Remote control (In case of SC-LX72)

Controls and displays

Controls and displays

Front panel

Controls and displays

Display

Controls and displays

Connecting your equipment

Chapter 3:

Connecting your equipment

Rear panel

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your equipment

Determining the speakers’ application

[1] 7.1ch surround connection

(Simple connection & Best surround)

[3] 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection

(Multi Zone)

[4] 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection

[2] 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping connection

(High quality surround)

Other speaker connection

Connecting your equipment

Placing the speakers

THX speaker system setup

Some tips for improving sound quality

Connecting your equipment

Connecting the speakers

Bare wire connections

Connecting your equipment